Downloaded from www.Manualslib.

com manuals search engine

 Preface

Thank you very much for purchasing DELTA’s AC servo products.

This manual will be helpful in the installation, wiring, inspection, and operation of Delta AC
servo drive and motor. Before using the product, please read this user manual to ensure
correct use.
You should thoroughly understand all safety precautions (DANGERS, WARNINGS and STOPS)
before proceeding with the installation, wiring and operation. If you do not understand please
contact your local Delta sales representative. Place this user manual in a safe location for
future reference.

Using This Manual

„ Contents of this manual
This manual is a user guide that provides the information on how to install, operate
and maintain ASDA-B2 series AC servo drives and ECMA series AC servo motors. The
contents of this manual include the following topics:
z Installation of AC servo drives and motors
z Configuration and wiring
z Trial run steps
z Control functions and adjusting methods of AC servo drives
z Parameter settings
z Communication protocol
z Inspection and maintenance
z Troubleshooting
z Application examples
„ Who should use this manual
This manual is intended for the following users:
z Those who are responsible for designing
z Those who are responsible for installing or wiring
z Those who are responsible for operating or programming
z Those who are responsible for maintaining or troubleshooting
„ Important precautions
Before using the product, please read this user manual thoroughly to ensure correct
use. Store this manual in a safe and handy place for quick reference whenever
necessary. Always observe the following precautions:
z Do not use the product in a potentially explosive environment.
z Install the product in a clean and dry location free from corrosive and
inflammable gases or liquids.

Revision June 2010 i

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preface

z Do not connect commercial power to the U, V, W terminals. Failure to observe

this precaution will cause severe damage to the Servo drive.
z Ensure that the motor and drive are correctly connected to a ground. The
grounding method must comply with the electrical standard of the country
(Please refer to NFPA 70: National Electrical Code, 2005 Ed.).
z Do not disconnect the AC servo drive and motor while the power is ON.
z Do not attach, modify or remove wiring while power is applied to the AC servo
drive.
z Before starting the operation with a mechanical system connected, make sure
the emergency stop equipment can be energized and work at any time.
z Do not touch the drive heat sink or the servo motor during operation, this
may cause serious personnel injury.

PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY.

Carefully note and observe the following safety precautions when receiving, inspecting,
installing, operating, maintaining and troubleshooting. The following words, DANGER,
WARNING and STOP are used to mark safety precautions when using the Delta’s servo product.
Failure to observe these precautions may void the warranty!

ASDA-B2 series drives are open type servo drives and must be installed in an NEMA enclosure
such as a protection control panel during operation to comply with the requirements of the
international safety standards. They are provided with precise feedback control and high-
speed calculation function incorporating DSP (Digital Signal Processor) technology, and
intended to drive three-phase permanent magnet synchronous motors (PMSM) to achieve
precise positioning by means of accurate current output generated by IGBT (Insulated Gate
Bipolar Transistor).
ASDA-B2 series drives can be used in industrial applications and for installation in an end-use
enclosure that do not exceed the specifications defined in the ASDA-B2 series user manual
(Drives, cables and motors are for use in a suitable enclosure with a minimum of a UL50 type
1 or NEMA 250 Type 1 rating).

The words, DANGER, WARNING and STOP, have the following meaning:

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation and if not avoided, may result in

serious injury or death.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation and if not avoided, may result in

minor to moderate injury or serious damage to the product.

Indicates an improper action that it is not recommended. Doing so may cause

damage or malfunction.

ii Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preface

Unpacking Check
¾ Please ensure that both the servo drive and motor are correctly matched for size (power
rating). Failure to observe this precaution may cause fire, seriously damage to the drive
/ motor or cause personal injury.

Installation
¾ Do not install the product in a location that is outside the stated specification for the
drive and motor. Failure to observe this caution may result in electric shock, fire, or
personal injury.

Wiring
¾ Connect the ground terminals to a class-3 ground (Ground resistance should not exceed
100 Ω). Improper grounding may result in electric shock or fire.
¾ Do not connect any power supplies to the U, V, W terminals. Failure to observe this
precaution may result in serious injury, damage to the drive or fire.
¾ Ensure that all screws, connectors and wire terminations are secure on the power supply,
servo drive and motor. Failure to observe this caution may result in damage, fire or
personal injury.

Operation
¾ Before starting the operation with a mechanical system connected, change the drive
parameters to match the user-defined parameters of the mechanical system. Starting the
operation without matching the correct parameters may result in servo drive or motor
damage, or damage to the mechanical system.
¾ Ensure that the emergency stop equipment or device is connected and working correctly
before operating the motor that is connected to a mechanical system.

¾ Do not approach or touch any rotating parts (e.g. shaft) while the motor is running.
Failure to observe this precaution may cause serious personal injury.

¾ In order to prevent accidents, the initial trial run for servo motor should be conducted
under no load conditions (separate the motor from its couplings and belts).
¾ For the initial trial run, do not operate the servo motor while it is connected to its
mechanical system. Connecting the motor to its mechanical system may cause damage or
result in personal injury during the trail run. Connect the servo motor once it has
successfully completed a trail run.
¾ Caution: Please perform trial run without load first and then perform trial run with load
connected. After the servo motor is running normally and regularly without load, then
run servo motor with load connected. Ensure to perform trial run in this order to prevent
unnecessary danger.
¾ Do not touch either the drive heat sink or the motor during operation as they may
become hot and personal injury may result.

Maintenance and Inspection

¾ Do not touch any internal or exposed parts of servo drive and servo motor as electrical
shock may result.
¾ Do not remove the operation panel while the drive is connected to an electrical power
source otherwise electrical shock may result.
¾ Wait at least 10 minutes after power has been removed before touching any drive or
motor terminals or performing any wiring and/or inspection as an electrical charge may
still remain in the servo drive and servo motor with hazardous voltages even after power
has been removed.
¾ Do not disassemble the servo drive or motor as electric shock may result.
¾ Do not connect or disconnect wires or connectors while power is applied to the drive and
motor.
¾ Only qualified personnel who have electrical knowledge should conduct maintenance and
inspection.

Revision June 2010 iii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Preface

Main Circuit Wiring

¾ Install the encoder cables in a separate conduit from the motor power cables to avoid
signal noise. Separate the conduits by 30cm (11.8inches) or more.
¾ Use multi-stranded twisted-pair wires or multi-core shielded-pair wires for signal,
encoder (PG) feedback cables. The maximum length of command input cable is 3m
(9.84ft.) and the maximum length of encoder (PG) feedback cables is 20m (65.62ft.).
¾ As a charge may still remain in the drive with hazardous voltages even after power has
been removed, be sure to wait at least 10 minutes after power has been removed before
performing any wiring and/or inspection.

¾ It is not recommended to frequently power the drive on and off. Do not turn the drive off
and on more than once per minute as high charging currents within the internal
capacitors may cause damage.

Main Circuit Terminal Wiring

¾ Please perform the wiring after the terminal blocks are all removed from the drive.
¾ Insert only one wire into one terminal on the terminal block.
¾ When inserting wires, please ensure that the conductors are not shorted to adjacent
terminals or wires.
¾ Ensure to double check the wiring before applying power to the drive.
¾ If the wiring is in error, perform the wiring again with proper tools. Never use force to
remove the terminals or wires. Otherwise, it may result in malfunction or damage.

NOTE 1) In this manual, actual measured values are in metric units. Dimensions in
(imperial units) are for reference only. Please use metric units for precise
measurements.
2) The content of this manual may be revised without prior notice. Please
consult our distributors or download the most updated version at
http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation.
.

iv Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Unpacking Check and Model Explanation............................................... 1-1

1.1 Unpacking Check ................................................................................................ 1-1

1.2 Model Explanation .............................................................................................. 1-2

1.2.1 Nameplate Information .............................................................................. 1-2

1.2.2 Model Name Explanation ........................................................................... 1-3

1.3 Servo Drive and Servo Motor Combinations ........................................................ 1-5

1.4 Servo Drive Features ........................................................................................... 1-6

1.5 Control Modes of Servo Drive ............................................................................. 1-7

Chapter 2 Installation and Storage ......................................................................... 2-1

2.1 Installation Notes................................................................................................ 2-1

2.2 Storage Conditions ............................................................................................. 2-1

2.3 Installation Conditions........................................................................................ 2-2

2.4 Installation Procedure and Minimum Clearances ................................................. 2-3

2.5 Molded-case Circuit Breaker and Fuse Current Recommended Value................... 2-5

2.6 EMI Filter Selection.............................................................................................. 2-6

2.7 Regenerative Resistor ......................................................................................... 2-9

Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring......................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Connections ....................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1.1 Connecting to Peripheral Devices............................................................... 3-1

3.1.2 Servo Drive Connectors and Terminals....................................................... 3-2

3.1.3 Wiring Methods ......................................................................................... 3-5

Revision June 2010 v

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Table of Contents

3.1.4 Motor Power Cable Connector Specifications ............................................. 3-7

3.1.5 Encoder Connector Specifications .............................................................. 3-9

3.1.6 Cable Specifications for Servo Drive ........................................................... 3-10

3.2 Basic Wiring ........................................................................................................ 3-12

3.3 Input / Output Interface Connector - CN1 ........................................................... 3-16

3.3.1 CN1 Terminal Identification ....................................................................... 3-16

3.3.2 Signals Explanation of Connector - CN1..................................................... 3-18

3.3.3 User-defined DI and DO signals ................................................................. 3-27

3.3.4 Wiring Diagrams of I/O Signals - CN1 ........................................................ 3-32

3.4 Encoder Connector - CN2.................................................................................... 3-33

3.5 Serial Communication Connector - CN3 .............................................................. 3-34

3.5.1 Terminal Layout and Identification – CN3 .................................................. 3-34

3.5.2 Connection between PC and Connector - CN3............................................ 3-35

3.6 Standard Connection Example ............................................................................ 3-36

3.6.1 Position (PT) Control Mode ........................................................................ 3-36

3.6.2 Speed Control Mode .................................................................................. 3-37

3.6.3 Torque Control Mode................................................................................. 3-38

Chapter 4 Display and Operation ........................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Description of Digital Keypad ............................................................................. 4-1

4.2 Display Flowchart ............................................................................................... 4-2

4.3 Status Display ..................................................................................................... 4-3

4.3.1 Save Setting Display................................................................................... 4-3

4.3.2 Abort Setting Display ................................................................................. 4-3

vi Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Table of Contents

4.3.3 Fault Message Display ............................................................................... 4-3

4.3.4 Polarity Setting Display .............................................................................. 4-3

4.3.5 Monitor Setting Display ............................................................................. 4-4

4.4 General Function Operation ................................................................................ 4-7

4.4.1 Fault Code Display Operation .................................................................... 4-7

4.4.2 JOG Operation ........................................................................................... 4-8

4.4.3 Force Output Control Operation ................................................................ 4-9

4.4.4 DI Diagnosis Operation.............................................................................. 4-10

4.4.5 DO Diagnosis Operation ............................................................................ 4-11

Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure............................................................. 5-1

5.1 Inspection without Load...................................................................................... 5-1

5.2 Applying Power to the Drive................................................................................ 5-3

5.3 JOG Trial Run without Load ................................................................................. 5-7

5.4 Speed Trial Run without Load ............................................................................. 5-9

5.5 Tuning Procedure ............................................................................................... 5-11

5.5.1 Tuning Flowchart....................................................................................... 5-12

5.5.2 Load Inertia Estimation Flowchart .............................................................. 5-13

5.5.3 Auto Mode Tuning Flowchart ..................................................................... 5-14

5.5.4 Semi-Auto Mode Tuning Flowchart............................................................. 5-15

5.5.5 Limit of Load Inertia Estimation ................................................................. 5-17

5.5.6 Mechanical Resonance Suppression Method .............................................. 5-19

5.5.7 Relationship between Tuning Modes and Parameters................................. 5-20

5.5.8 Gain Adjustment in Manual Mode .............................................................. 5-21

Revision June 2010 vii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Table of Contents

Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation .................................................................. 6-1

6.1 Control Modes of Operation................................................................................ 6-1

6.2 Position Control Mode ........................................................................................ 6-2

6.2.1 Command Source of Position (PT) Control Mode ........................................ 6-2

6.2.2 Structure of Position Control Mode ............................................................ 6-4

6.2.3 Electronic Gear Ratio.................................................................................. 6-5

6.2.4 Low-pass Filter........................................................................................... 6-5

6.2.5 Position Loop Gain Adjustment.................................................................. 6-7

6.3 Speed Control Mode ........................................................................................... 6-10

6.3.1 Command Source of Speed Control Mode .................................................. 6-10

6.3.2 Structure of Speed Control Mode ............................................................... 6-11

6.3.3 Smoothing Strategy of Speed Control Mode ............................................... 6-12

6.3.4 Analog Speed Input Scaling ....................................................................... 6-16

6.3.5 Timing Chart of Speed Control Mode ......................................................... 6-17

6.3.6 Speed Loop Gain Adjustment..................................................................... 6-18

6.3.7 Resonance Suppression ............................................................................. 6-25

6.4 Torque Control Mode.......................................................................................... 6-32

6.4.1 Command Source of Torque Control Mode ................................................ 6-32

6.4.2 Structure of Torque Control Mode ............................................................. 6-33

6.4.3 Smoothing Strategy of Torque Control Mode ............................................. 6-34

6.4.4 Analog Torque Input Scaling...................................................................... 6-34

6.4.5 Timing Chart of Torque Control Mode ....................................................... 6-35

6.5 Control Mode Selection....................................................................................... 6-36

viii Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Table of Contents

6.5.1 Speed / Position Control Mode Selection.................................................... 6-36

6.5.2 Speed / Torque Control Mode Selection..................................................... 6-37

6.5.3 Torque / Position Control Mode Selection.................................................. 6-37

6.6 Others ................................................................................................................ 6-38

6.6.1 Speed Limit................................................................................................ 6-38

6.6.2 Torque Limit.............................................................................................. 6-38

6.6.3 Analog Monitor.......................................................................................... 6-39

6.6.4 Electromagnetic Brake ............................................................................... 6-42

Chapter 7 Parameters ............................................................................................ 7-1

7.1 Definition ........................................................................................................... 7-1

7.2 Parameter Summary............................................................................................ 7-2

7.3 Detailed Parameter Listings ................................................................................ 7-11

Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications ..................................................................... 8-1

8.1 Communication Hardware Interface .................................................................... 8-1

8.2 Communication Parameter Settings .................................................................... 8-4

8.3 MODBUS Communication Protocol ...................................................................... 8-8

8.4 Communication Parameter Write-in and Read-out ............................................... 8-16

Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspection .................................................................. 9-1

9.1 Basic Inspection .................................................................................................. 9-1

9.2 Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 9-2

9.3 Life of Replacement Components........................................................................ 9-3

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 10-1

10.1 Fault Messages Table ........................................................................................ 10-1

Revision June 2010 ix

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Table of Contents

10.2 Potential Cause and Corrective Actions ............................................................. 10-3

10.3 Clearing Faults.................................................................................................. 10-11

Chapter 11 Specifications..................................................................................... 11-1

11.1 Specifications of Servo Drive (ASDA-B2 Series)................................................... 11-1

11.2 Specifications of Servo Motor (ECMA Series) ...................................................... 11-3

11.3 Servo Motor Speed-Torque Curves .................................................................... 11-8

11.4 Overload Characteristics ................................................................................... 11-9

11.5 Dimensions of Servo Drive ................................................................................ 11-11

11.6 Dimensions of Servo Motor ............................................................................... 11-15

Appendix A Accessories ........................................................................................ A-1

x Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Table of Contents

About this Manual…

User Information
Be sure to store this manual in a safe place.
Due to constantly growing product range, technical improvement, alteration or changed texts,
figures and diagrams, we reserve the right to make information changes within this manual
without prior notice.
Coping or reproducing any part of this manual, without written consent of Delta Electronics
Inc. is prohibited.

Technical Support and Service

You are welcome to contact our Technical Support Team at the below numbers or visit our
web site (http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/) if you need technical support,
service, information, or if you have any questions in the use of this product. We look forward
to serving your needs and are willing to offer our best support and service to you.

ASIA JAPAN
DELTA ELECTRONICS, INC. DELTA ELECTRONICS (JAPAN), INC.
Taoyuan Plant 1 Tokyo Office
31-1, XINGBANG ROAD, DELTA SHIBADAIMON BUILDING
GUISHAN INDUSTRIAL ZONE, 2-1-14 SHIBADAIMON, MINATO-KU,
TAOYUAN COUNTY 33370, TAIWAN, R.O.C. TOKYO, 105-0012, JAPAN
TEL: 886-3-362-6301 TEL: 81-3-5733-1111
FAX: 886-3-362-7267 FAX: 81-3-5733-1211

NORTH/SOUTH AMERICA EUROPE

DELTA PRODUCTS CORPORATION (USA) DELTRONICS (THE NETHERLANDS) B.V.

Raleigh Office Eindhoven Office

P.O. BOX 12173 DE WITBOGT 15, 5652 AG EINDHOVEN,

5101 DAVIS DRIVE, THE NETHERLANDS

RESEARCH TRIANGLE PARK, NC 27709, TEL: 31-40-259-2850

U.S.A. FAX: 31-40-259-2851
TEL: 1-919-767-3813
FAX: 1-919-767-3969

Revision June 2010 xi

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Table of Contents

This page intentionally left blank.

xii Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 1 Unpacking Check and Model Explanation

1.1 Unpacking Check

After receiving the AC servo drive, please check for the following:

„ Ensure that the product is what you have ordered.

Verify the part number indicated on the nameplate corresponds with the part number of
your order (Please refer to Section 1.2 for details about the model explanation).

„ Ensure that the servo motor shaft rotates freely.

Rotate the motor shaft by hand; a smooth rotation will indicate a good motor. However, a
servo motor with an electromagnetic brake can not be rotated manually.

„ Check for damage.

Inspect the unit to insure it was not damaged during shipment.

„ Check for loose screws.

Ensure that all necessary screws are tight and secure.

If any items are damaged or incorrect, please inform the distributor whom you purchased the
product from or your local Delta sales representative.
A complete and workable AC servo system should include the following parts:
Part I : Delta standard supplied parts
(1) Servo drive

(2) Servo motor

(3) 5 PIN Terminal Block (for L1c, L2c, R, S, T)
(4) 3 PIN Terminal Block (for U, V, W)
(5) 4 PIN Terminal Block (for P , D, C, )
(6) One operating lever (for wire to terminal block insertion)
(7) One jumper bar (installed at pins P and D of the 3 PIN Terminal Block for P , D, C)
(8) Instruction Sheets
Part II : Optional parts (Refer to Appendix A)
(1) One power cable, which is used to connect servo motor to U, V, W terminals of servo
drive. This power cable includes a green grounding cable. Please connect the green
grounding cable to the ground terminal of the servo drive.

Revision June 2010 1-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 1 Unpacking Check and Model Explanation

(2) One encoder cable, which is used to connect the encoder of servo motor to the CN2
terminal of servo drive.
(3) CN1 Connector: 4 PIN Connector (3M type analog product)
(4) CN2 Connector: 9 PIN Connector (3M type analog product)
(5) CN3 Connector: 6 PIN Connector (IEEE1394 analog product)

1.2 Model Explanation

1.2.1 Nameplate Information

ASDA-B2 Series Servo Drive
„ Nameplate Explanation

„ Serial Number Explanation

ASMT Series Servo Motor

„ Nameplate Explanation

„ Serial Number Explanation

1-2 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 1 Unpacking Check and Model Explanation

1.2.2 Model Name Explanation

ASDA-B2 Series Servo Drive

Revision June 2010 1-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 1 Unpacking Check and Model Explanation

ECMA Series Servo Motor

1-4 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 1 Unpacking Check and Model Explanation

1.3 Servo Drive and Servo Motor Combinations

The table below shows the possible combination of Delta ASDA-B2 series servo drives and
ECMA series servo motors. The boxes (…) in the model names are for optional configurations.
(Please refer to Section 1.2 for model explanation)

Power Servo Drive Servo Motor

100W ASD-B2-0121-B ECMA-C20401…S（S=8mm）
200W ASD-B2-0221-B ECMA-C20602…S（S=14mm）
ECMA-C20604…S (S=14mm)
ECMA-CM0604…S (S=14mm)
400W ASD-B2-0421-B ECMA-C20804…7 (7=14mm)
ECMA-E21305…S (S=22mm)
ECMA-G21303…S (S=22mm)
ECMA-C20807…S (S=19mm)
ECMA-C20907…S (S=16mm)
750W ASD-B2-0721-B
ECMA-G21306…S (S=22mm)
ECMA-GM1306…S (S=22mm)
ECMA-C21010…S (S=22mm)
ECMA-C20910…S (S=16mm)
1000W ASD-B2-1021-B ECMA-E21310…S (S=22mm)
ECMA-G21309…S (S=22mm)
ECMA-GM1309…S (S=22mm)
1500W ASD-B2-1521-B ECMA-E21315…S (S=22mm)
ECMA-C21020…S (S=22mm)
2000W ASD-B2-2023-B ECMA-E21320…S (S=22mm)
ECMA-E21820…S (S=35mm)
ECMA-E21830…S (S=35mm)
3000W ASD-B2-3023-B
ECMA-F21830…S (S=35mm)

The servo drives shown in the above table are designed for use in combination with the
specific servo motors. Check the specifications of the drives and motors you want to use.
Also, please ensure that both the servo drive and motor are correctly matched for size (power
rating). If the power of motor and drive is not within the specifications, the drive and motor
may overheat and servo alarm would be activated. For the detail specifications of servo drives
and motors, please refer to Chapter 11 “Specifications”.
The drives shown in the above table are designed according to the three multiple of rated
current of motors shown in the above table. If the drives which are designed according to the
six multiple of rated current of motors are needed, please contact our distributors or your
local Delta sales representative.

Revision June 2010 1-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 1 Unpacking Check and Model Explanation

1.4 Servo Drive Features

1-6 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 1 Unpacking Check and Model Explanation

1.5 Control Modes of Servo Drive

The Delta Servo provides six single and five dual modes of operation.
Their operation and description is listed in the following table.

Mode Code Description

External Position control mode for the servo motor
External Position Control P
is achieved via an external pulse command.
(External / Internal) Speed control mode for the
servo motor can be achieved via parameters set
within the controller or from an external analog -10
Speed Control S
~ +10 VDC command. Control of the internal speed
mode is via the Digital Inputs (DI). (A maximum of
three speeds can be stored internally).
Internal Speed control mode for the servo motor is
only achieved via parameters set within the
Internal Speed Control Sz controller. Control of the internal speed mode is via
Single the Digital Inputs (DI). (A maximum of three speeds
Mode can be stored internally).
(External / Internal) Torque control mode for the
servo motor can be achieved via parameters set
within the controller or from an external analog -10
Torque Control T
~ +10 VDC command. Control of the internal torque
mode is via the Digital Inputs (DI). (A maximum of
three torque levels can be stored internally).
Tz Internal Torque control mode for the servo motor is
only achieved via parameters set within the
Internal Torque Control controller. Control of the internal torque mode is
via the Digital Inputs (DI). (A maximum of three
torque levels can be stored internally).
S-P Either S or P control mode can be selected via the
Digital Inputs (DI)
T-P Either T or P control mode can be selected via the
Dual Mode
Digital Inputs (DI)
S-T Either S or T control mode can be selected via the
Digital Inputs (DI)

The above control modes can be accessed and changed via parameter P1-01. Enter the new
control mode via P1-01 then switch the main power to the servo drive OFF then ON. The new
control mode will only be valid after the drives main power is switched OFF then ON. Please
see safety precautions on page iii (switching drive off/on multiple times).

Revision June 2010 1-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 1 Unpacking Check and Model Explanation

This page intentionally left blank.

1-8 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 2 Installation and Storage

2.1 Installation Notes

Please pay close attention to the following installation notes:

„ Do not bend or strain the connection cables between servo drive and motor.

„ When mounting the servo drive, make sure to tighten all screws to secure the drive in
place.

„ If the servo motor shaft is coupled directly to a rotating device ensure that the alignment
specifications of the servo motor, coupling, and device are followed. Failure to do so may
cause unnecessary loads or premature failure to the servo motor.

„ If the length of cable connected between servo drive and motor is more than 20m, please
increase the wire gauge of the encoder cable and motor connection cable (connected to U,
V, W terminals).

„ Make sure to tighten the screws for securing motor.

2.2 Storage Conditions

The product should be kept in the shipping carton before installation. In order to retain the
warranty coverage, the AC servo drive should be stored properly when it is not to be used for
an extended period of time. Some storage suggestions are:

„ Store in a clean and dry location free from direct sunlight.

„ Store within an ambient temperature range of -20°C to +65°C (-4°F to 149°F).

„ Store within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and non-condensing.

„ Do not store in a place subjected to corrosive gases and liquids.

„ Store in original packaging and placed on a solid surface.

Revision June 2010 2-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 2 Installation and Storage

2.3 Installation Conditions

Operating Temperature
ASDA-B2 Series Servo Drive : 0°C to 55°C (32°F to 131°F)
ECMA Series Servo Motor : 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
The ambient temperature of servo drive should be under 45°C (113°F) for long-term
reliability.
If the ambient temperature of servo drive is greater than 45°C (113°F), please install the drive
in a well-ventilated location and do not obstruct the airflow for the cooling fan.

Caution
The servo drive and motor will generate heat. If they are installed in a control panel, please
ensure sufficient space around the units for heat dissipation.
Pay particular attention to vibration of the units and check if the vibration has impacted the
electric devices in the control panel. Please observe the following precautions when selecting
a mounting location. Failure to observe the following precautions may void the warranty!

„ Do not mount the servo drive or motor adjacent to heat-radiating elements or in direct
sunlight.

„ Do not mount the servo drive or motor in a location subjected to corrosive gases, liquids,
airborne dust or metallic particles.

„ Do not mount the servo drive or motor in a location where temperatures and humidity will
exceed specification.

„ Do not mount the servo drive or motor in a location where vibration and shock will exceed
specification.

„ Do not mount the servo drive or motor in a location where it will be subjected to high
levels of electromagnetic radiation.

2-2 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 2 Installation and Storage

2.4 Installation Procedure and Minimum Clearances

Installation Procedure
Incorrect installation may result in a drive malfunction or premature failure of the drive and or
motor. Please follow the guidelines in this manual when installing the servo drive and motor.
The ASDA-B2 servo drives should be mounted perpendicular to the wall or in the control panel.
In order to ensure the drive is well ventilated, ensure that the all ventilation holes are not
obstructed and sufficient free space is given to the servo drive. Do not install the drive in a
horizontal position or malfunction and damage will occur.

Drive Mounting
The ASDA-B2 servo drives must be back mounted vertically on a dry and solid surface such as
a NEMA enclosure. A minimum spacing of two inches must be maintained above and below
the drive for ventilation and heat dissipation. Additional space may be necessary for wiring
and cable connections. Also, as the drive conducts heat away via the mounting, the mounting
plane or surface should not conduct heat into the drive from external sources
Motor Mounting

The ECMA servo motors should be mounted firmly to a dry and solid mounting surface to
ensure maximum heat transfer for maximum power output and to provide a good ground.
For the dimensions and weights specifications of servo drive or motor, please refer to Chapter
11 “Specifications".
Minimum Clearances
Install a fan to increase ventilation to avoid ambient temperatures that exceed the
specification. When installing two or more drives adjacent to each other please follow the
clearances as shown in the following diagram.

Revision June 2010 2-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 2 Installation and Storage

„ Minimum Clearances

„ Side by Side Installation

2-4 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 2 Installation and Storage

2.5 Molded-case Circuit Breaker and Fuse Current Recommended Value

¾ Caution: Please use molded-case circuit breaker and fuse which are recognized by and
comply with the UL or CSA standards.

Servo Drive Model Recommended Breaker Recommended Fuse (Class T)

Operation Mode General General
ASD-B2-0121-B 5A 5A
ASD-B2-0221-B 5A 6A
ASD-B2-0421-B 10A 10A
ASD-B2-0721-B 10A 20A
ASD-B2-1021-B 15A 25A
ASD-B2-1521-B 20A 40A
ASD-B2-2023-B 30A 50A
ASD-B2-3023-B 30A 70A

Revision June 2010 2-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 2 Installation and Storage

2.6 EMI Filter Selection

AC Servo Drive - EMI Filter Cross Reference

Item Power Servo Drive Model Recommended EMI Filter FootPrint

1 100W ASD-B2-0121-B 08TDT1W4S N
2 200W ASD-B2-0221-B 08TDT1W4S N
3 400W ASD-B2-0421-B 08TDT1W4S N
4 750W ASD-B2-0721-B 20TDT1W4D N
5 1000W ASD-B2-1021-B 20TDT1W4D N
6 1500W ASD-B2-1521-B 20TDT1W4D N
7 2000W ASD-B2-2023-B 20TDT1W4D N
8 3000W ASD-B2-3023-B 20TDT1W4D N

Installation

All electrical equipment, including AC servo drives, will generate high-frequency/low-

frequency noise and will interfere with peripheral equipment by radiation or conduction when
in operation. By using an EMI filter with correct installation, much of the interference can be
eliminated. It is recommended to use Delta’s EMI filter to have the best interference
elimination performance.
We assure that it can comply with following rules when AC servo drive and EMI filter are
installed and wired according to user manual:

„ EN61000-6-4 (2001)

„ EN61800-3 (2004) PDS of category C2

„ EN55011+A2 (2007) Class A Group 1

General Precaution
To ensure the best interference elimination performance when using Delta’s EMI filter, please
follow the guidelines in this user manual to perform wiring and/or installation. In addition,
please also observe the following precautions:

„ EMI filter and AC servo drive should be installed on the same metal plate.

„ Please install AC servo drive on same footprint with EMI filter or install EMI filter as close
as possible to the AC servo drive.

„ All wiring should be as short as possible.

„ Metal plate should be grounded.

„ The cover of EMI filter and AC servo drive or grounding should be fixed on the metal plate
and the contact area should be as large as possible.

2-6 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 2 Installation and Storage

Choose Suitable Motor Cable and Precautions

Improper installation and choice of motor cable will affect the performance of EMI filter. Be
sure to observe the following precautions when selecting motor cable.

„ Use the cable with shielding (double shielding is the best).

„ The shielding on both ends of the motor cable should be grounded with the minimum
length and maximum contact area.

„ Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with the plate and shielding
(Please refer to Figure 1 below).

„ The connection between the metal saddle and the shielding on both ends of the motor
cable should be correct and well installed. Please refer to Figure 2 on next page for
correct wiring method.

Figure 1

Saddle on both ends

Saddle on one end

Figure 2

Revision June 2010 2-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 2 Installation and Storage

Dimensions
Delta Part Number: 08TDT1W4S

Delta Part Number: 20TDT1W4D

2-8 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 2 Installation and Storage

2.7 Regenerative Resistor

Built-in Regenerative Resistor

When the output torque of servo motor in reverse direction of motor rotation speed, it
indicates that there is a regenerative power returned from the load to the servo drive. This
power will be transmitted into the capacitance of DC Bus and result in rising voltage. When
the voltage has risen to some high voltage, the servo system need to dissipate the extra
energy by using a regenerative resistor. ASDA-B2 series servo drive provides a built-in
regenerative resistor and the users also can connect to external regenerative resistor if more
regenerative capacity is needed.
The following table shows the specifications of the servo drive’s built-in regenerative resistor
and the amount of regenerative power (average value) that it can process.
Built-in Regenerative Resistor Specifications
Regenerative Power
Min. Allowable
Servo Drive Resistance (Ohm) Capacity (Watt) processed by built-in
Resistance
(kW) (parameter P1-52) (parameter P1-53) regenerative resistor
(Ohm)
(Watt) *1
0.1 -- -- -- 60
0.2 -- -- -- 60
0.4 -- -- -- 60
0.75 100 60 30 60
1.0 40 60 30 30
1.5 40 60 30 30
2.0 40 60 60 15
3.0 40 60 60 15
*1 Regenerative Power Calculation: The amount of regenerative power (average value) that
can be processed is rated at 50% of the capacity of the servo drive's built-in regenerative
resistor. The regenerative power calculation method of external regenerative resistor is the
same.
When the regenerative power exceeds the processing capacity of the servo drive, install an
external regenerative resistor. Please pay close attention on the following notes when using a
regenerative resistor.

1. Make sure that the settings of resistance (parameter P1-52) and capacity (parameter P1-
53) is set correctly.
2. When the users want to install an external regenerative resistor, ensure that its
resistance value is the same as the resistance of built-in regenerative resistor. If
combining multiple small-capacity regenerative resistors in parallel to increase the
regenerative resistor capacity, make sure that the resistance value of the regenerative
resistor should comply with the specifications listed in the above table.
3. In general, when the amount of regenerative power (average value) that can be
processed is used at or below the rated load ratio, the resistance temperature will

Revision June 2010 2-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 2 Installation and Storage

increase to 120°C or higher (on condition that when the regeneration continuously
occurred). For safety reasons, forced air cooling is good way that can be used to reduce
the temperature of the regenerative resistors. We also recommend the users to use the
regenerative resistors with thermal switches. As for the load characteristics of the
regenerative resistors, please check with the manufacturer.

External Regenerative Resistor

When using external regenerative resistor, connect it to P and C, and make sure the circuit
between P and D is open. We recommend the users should use the external regenerative
resistor that the resistance value following the above table (Built-in Regenerative Resistor
Specifications). We ignore the dissipative power of IGBT (Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor) in
order to let the users easily calculate the capacity of regenerative resistor. In the following
sections, we will describe Regenerative Power Calculation Method and Simple Calculation
Method for calculating the regenerative power capacity of external regenerative resistors.

Regenerative Power Calculation Method

(1) Without Load
When there is no external load torque, if the servo motor repeats operation, the returned
regenerative power generated when braking will transmitted into the capacitance of DC
bus. After the capacitance voltage exceeds some high value, regenerative resistor can
dissipate the remained regenerative power. Use the table and procedure described below
to calculate the regenerative power.

Regenerative power Max. regenerative

Servo Drive Rotor Inertia from empty load power of
Servo Motor
(kW) J (× 10-4kg.m2) 3000r/min to stop capacitance
Eo (joule) Ec(joule)
0.1 ECMA-C20401…… 0.037 0.18 3
0.2 ECMA-C20602…… 0.177 0.87 4
ECMA-C20604…… 0.277 1.37
Low 0.4 8
ECMA-C20804…… 0.68 3.36
Inertia
0.75 ECMA-C20807…… 1.13 5.59 14
1.0 ECMA-C21010…… 2.65 13.1 18
2.0 ECMA-C21020…… 4.45 22.0 21
0.4 ECMA-E21305…… 8.17 40.40 8
1.0 ECMA-E21310…… 8.41 41.59 18
Medium 1.5 ECMA-E21315…… 11.18 55.28 18
Inertia
ECMA-E21320…… 14.59 72.15
2.0 21
ECMA-E21820…… 34.68 171.50
3.0 ECMA-E21830…… 54.95 271.73 28

2-10 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 2 Installation and Storage

Regenerative power Max. regenerative

Servo Drive Rotor Inertia from empty load power of
Servo Motor
(kW) J (× 10-4kg.m2) 3000r/min to stop capacitance
Eo (joule) Ec(joule)
0.4 ECMA-G21303…… 8.17 40.40 8
High
0.75 ECMA-G21306…… 8.41 41.59 14
Inertia
1.0 ECMA-G21309…… 11.18 55.29 18

Eo = J x wr2/182 (joule) , Wr : r/min

If the load inertia is N × motor inertia, the regenerative power will be (N+1) x E0 when
servo motor brakes from 3000r/min to 0. Then, the regenerative resistor can dissipate:
(N+1) x E0 - Ec (joule). If the time of repeat operation cycle is T sec, then the regenerative
power = 2 x ((N+1) x E0 - Ec) / T.
The calculating procedure is as follows:

Step Procedure Equation and Setting Method

Set the capacity of
1 regenerative resistor to the Change the value of P1-53 to maximum
maximum
2 Set the operation cycle T Input by the users
Input by the users or read via P0-02 Drive State
3 Set motor speed wr
Display
Input by the users or read via P0-02 Drive State
4 Set load/motor inertia ratio N
Display
Calculate the max.
5 Eo = J x wr2/182
regenerative power Eo
Set the regenerative power Ec
6 Refer to the table above
that can be absorbed
Calculate the required
7 2 x (N+1) x Eo－Ec）/ T
regenerative power capacity

For example:
If we use 400W servo drive, the time of repeat operation cycle is T = 0.4 sec, max. motor
speed is 3000r/min, the load inertia = 7 × motor inertia, then the necessary the power of
regenerative resistor = 2 x ( (7+1) × 1.68 - 8) / 0.4 = 27.2W. If the calculation result is
smaller than regenerative power, we recommend the users to use the built-in 60W
regenerative resistor. Usually the built-in regenerative resistor provided by ASDA-B2 series
can meet the requirement of general application when the external load inertia is not
excessive.
The users can see when the capacity of regenerative resistor is too small, the accumulated
power will be larger and the temperature will also increase. The fault, ALE05 may occur if
the temperature is over high. The following figure shows the actual operation of
regenerative resistor.

Revision June 2010 2-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 2 Installation and Storage

(2) With Load

When there is an external load torque, servo motor is in reverse rotation when external
load greater than motor torque. Servo motor is usually in forward rotation and the motor
torque output direction is the same as the rotation direction. However, there is still some
special condition. If the motor output torque is in the reverse direction of rotation, the
servo motor is also in the reverse direction of rotation. The external power is input into
the servo drive through servo motor. The figure below is an example. The users can see
the motor is in forward rotation at constant speed when a sudden external load torque
change and great power is transmitted to regenerative resistor rapidly.

Motor Rotation Speed

External Load Torque

Motor Output Torque

Reverse Forward Reverse Forward

Rotation Rotation Rotation Rotation

External load torque in reverse direction: TL x Wr TL : External load torque

For the safety, we strongly recommend the users should select the proper resistance value
according to the load.
For example:
When external load torque is a +70% rated torque and rotation speed reaches 3000r/min,
if using 400W servo drive (rated torque: 1.27Nt-m), then the users need to connect a
external regenerative resistor which power is 2 x (0.7 x 1.27) x (3000 x 2 x π/ 60) = 560W,
40Ω.

2-12 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 2 Installation and Storage

Simple Calculation Method

The users can select the adequate regenerative resistors according to the allowable frequency
required by actual operation and the allowable frequency when the servo motor runs without
load. The allowable frequency when the servo motor run without load is the maximum
frequency that can be operated during continuous operation when servo motor accelerate
from 0r/min to rated speed and decelerate from rated speed down to 0r/min. The allowable
frequencies when the servo motor run without load are summarized in the following table.

Allowable Frequencies for Servo Motor Running Without Load (times/min)

When Using Built-in Regenerative Resistor
Motor Capacity 600W 750W 900W 1.0kW 1.5kW 2.0kW 2.0kW 3.0kW
ECMA Series 06 07 09 10 15 20 20 30
83
ECMA□□C - 312 - 137 - -
(F100)
24 10
ECMA□□E - - - 42 32 11
(F130) (F180)
ECMA□□G 42 - 31 - - - - -

( ) : motor frame size, unit is in millimeters.

When the servo motor runs with load, the allowable frequency will change according to
the changes of the load inertia and rotation speed. Use the following equation to calculate
the allowable frequency.
2
Allowable frequency when serv o motor run without load Rated s peed times
Allowable fr equency = x
m+1 Operating speed mi n.

m = load/motor inertia ratio

Revision June 2010 2-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 2 Installation and Storage

The users can select the adequate regenerative resistors according to the allowable
frequency by referring to the table below:

Allowable Frequencies for Servo Motor Running Without Load (times/min)

When Using External Regenerative Resistor

Motor Capacity ECMA……C

400W 400W
100W 200W 750W 1.0kW 2.0kW
Delta External (F60) (F80)
Regenerative Resistor 01 02 04 04 07 10 20
BR400W040 (400W 40Ω) - - 8608 3506 2110 925 562
BR1K0W020 (1kW 20Ω) - - - 8765 5274 2312 1406
Motor Capacity ECMA……E
0.5kW 1kW 1.5kW 2.0kW 2.0kW 3.0kW
Delta External
Regenerative Resistor 05 1.0 15 20 20 30

163 68
BR400W040 (400W 40Ω) 291 283 213 -
(F130) (F180)
BR1K0W020 (1kW 20Ω) 729 708 533 408 171 -
BR3K0W010 (1kW 10Ω) - - - - - 331
Motor Capacity ECMA……G
0.3kW 0.6kW 0.9kW
Delta External
Regenerative Resistor 03 06 09

BR400W040 (400W 40Ω) 292 283 213

BR1K0W020 (1kW 20Ω) 729 708 533

( ) : motor frame size, unit is in millimeters.

When the regenerative resistor capacity is not enough, the users can connect to multiple
the same capacity regenerative resistors in parallel to increase it.

2-14 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 2 Installation and Storage

Dimensions
Delta Part Number：BR400W040（400W 40Ω）

L1 L2 H D W MAX. WEIGHT(g)
265 250 30 5.3 60 930

Delta Part Number：BR1K0W020（1kW 20Ω）

L1 L2 H D W MAX. WEIGHT(g)
400 385 50 5.3 100 2800

Revision June 2010 2-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 2 Installation and Storage

NOTE

Regarding the selection of regenerative resistor, please refer to the table of regenerative
resistor specifications described in Appendix A.

2-16 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

This chapter provides information on wiring ASDA-B2 series products, the descriptions of I/O
signals and gives typical examples of wiring diagrams.

3.1 Connections

3.1.1 Connecting to Peripheral Devices

Revision June 2010 3-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

3.1.2 Servo Drive Connectors and Terminals

Terminal Terminal
Notes
Identification Description
Used to connect single-phase AC control circuit
Control circuit
L1c, L2c power. (Control circuit uses the same voltage as the
terminal
main circuit.)

R, S, T Used to connect single-phase or three-phase AC

Main circuit
(for 220V main circuit power depending on connecting servo
terminal
models) drive model.

Used to connect servo motor

Terminal
Wire Color Description
Symbol
U Red Connecting to
U, V, W three-phase
Servo motor V White
motor main
output
FG ( ) W Black circuit cable.
Connecting to
ground terminal
FG( ) Green
( ) of the
servo drive.
Ensure the circuit is closed
Internal
between P and D, and the circuit
resistor
is open between P and C.
Connect regenerative resistor to
External
P and C, and ensure an open
resistor
circuit between P and D.
Regenerative Connect braking unit to P and ,
P , D, C, resistor terminal and ensure an open circuit
or braking unit between P and D, and P and C.
(N terminal is built in L1c, L2c, ,
External and R, S, T.)
braking unit
P : Connecting to (+) terminal of
V_BUS voltage.
: Connecting to (-) terminal of
V_BUS voltage.
Used to connect grounding wire of power supply
two places Ground terminal and servo motor.

3-2 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

Terminal Terminal
Notes
Identification Description
Used to connect external controllers. Please refer to
CN1 I/O connector
section 3.3 for details.
Used to connect encoder of servo motor. Please
refer to section 3.4 for details.
Terminal
Wire Color PIN No.
Symbol
T+ Blue 4
T- Blue/Black 5
Encoder
CN2 connector Reserved - 3
Reserved - 2
Reserved - 1
Reserved - 9
+5V Red & Bed/White 8
GND Black & Black/White 6,7
Communication Used to connect PC or keypad. Please refer to
CN3 connector section 3.5 for details.
Reserved
CN4 Reserved
connector
Analog voltage Used to monitor the operation status. The drive
output terminal provides two channels, MON1 and MON2 to output
CN5
the analog voltage data. Output voltage is reference
to the power ground (GND).

NOTE
1) U, V ,W , CN1, CN2, CN3 terminals provide short circuit protection.

Revision June 2010 3-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

Wiring Notes
Please observe the following wiring notes while performing wiring and touching any
electrical connections on the servo drive or servo motor.
1. Ensure to check if the power supply and wiring of the "power" terminals (R, S, T,
L1c, L2c, U, V, & W) is correct.
2. Please use shielded twisted-pair cables for wiring to prevent voltage coupling and
eliminate electrical noise and interference.
3. As a residual hazardous voltage may remain inside the drive, please do not
immediately touch any of the "power" terminals (R, S, T, L1c, L2c, U, V, & W) and/or
the cables connected to them after the power has been turned off and the charge
LED is lit. (Please refer to the Safety Precautions on page ii).
4. The cables connected to R, S, T and U, V, W terminals should be placed in separate
conduits from the encoder or other signal cables. Separate them by at least 30cm
(11.8 inches).
5. If the encoder cable is too short, please use a twisted-shield signal wire with
grounding conductor. The wire length should be 20m (65.62ft.) or less. For lengths
greater than 20m (65.62ft.), the wire gauge should be doubled in order to lessen
any signal attenuation. Regarding the specifications of 20m (65.62ft.) encoder
cable, please choose wire gauge AWG26, UL2464 metal braided shield twisted-pair
cable.

6. As for motor cable selection, please use the 600V PTFE wire and the wire length
should be less than 98.4ft. (30m). If the wiring distance is longer than 30m
(98.4ft.), please choose the adequate wire size according to the voltage.

7. The shield of shielded twisted-pair cables should be connected to the SHIELD end
(terminal marked ) of the servo drive.

8. For the connectors and cables specifications, please refer to section 3.1.6 for
details.

3-4 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

3.1.3 Wiring Methods

For servo drives from 100W to 1.5kW the input power can be either single or three-phase.
However, single -phase connections are for servo drives 1.5kW and below only.
In the wiring diagram figures 3.2& 3.3:
Power ON : contact “a” (normally open)
Power OFF : contact “b” (normally closed)
MC : coil of electromagnetic contactor, self-holding power, contact of main circuit power

Figure 3.2 Single-Phase Power Supply (1.5kW and below)

Revision June 2010 3-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

Figure 3.3 Three-Phase Power Supply (all models)

3-6 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

3.1.4 Motor Power Cable Connector Specifications

The boxes (…) in the model names are for optional configurations. (Please refer to section
1.2 for model explanation.)

Terminal
Motor Model Name U, V, W / Electromagnetic Brake Connector
Identification
ECMA-C20401…S (100W)
ECMA-C20602…S (200W)
ECMA-C20604…S (400W)
ECMA-CM0604PS (400W) A
ECMA-C20804…7 (400W)
ECMA-C20807…S (750W)
ECMA-C20907…S (750W) HOUSING: JOWLE (C4201H00-2*2PA)

ECMA-C20602…S (200W)
ECMA-C20604…S (400W)
ECMA-CM0604PS (400W)
B
ECMA-C20804…7 (400W)
ECMA-C20807…S (750W)
ECMA-C20907…S (750W)
HOUSING: JOWLE (C4201H00-2*3PA)
ECMA-G21303…S (300W)
ECMA-E21305…S (500W)
ECMA-G21306…S (600W)
ECMA-GM1306PS (600W)
ECMA-G21309…S (900W)
ECMA-GM1309PS (900W)
C
ECMA-C21010…S (1000W)
ECMA-C20910…S (1000W)
ECMA-E21310…S (1000W)
ECMA-E21315…S (1500W)
ECMA-C21020…S (2000W) 3106A-20-18S
ECMA-E21320…S (2000W)

ECMA-E31820…S (2000W)
ECMA-E31830…S (3000W) D
ECMA-F21830…S (3000W)

3106A-24-11S

Revision June 2010 3-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

Terminal U V W CASE GROUND BRAKE1 BRAKE2

Identification (Red) (White) (Black) (Green) (Blue) (Brown)
A 1 2 3 4 - -
B 1 2 4 5 3 6
C F I B E G H
D D E F G A B

NOTE
1) The coil of brake has no polarity. The names of terminal identification are BRAKE1 (Blue)
and BRAKE2 (Brown).
2) The power supply for brake is DC24V. Never use it for VDD, the +24V source voltage.

3-8 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

3.1.5 Encoder Connector Specifications

The boxes (…) in the model names are for optional configurations. (Please refer to section
1.2 for model explanation.)

Terminal
Motor Model Name Encoder Connector
Identification

ECMA-C20401…S (100W)
ECMA-C20602…S (200W)
ECMA-C20604…S (400W)
ECMA-CM0604PS (400W) A
ECMA-C20804…7 (400W)
ECMA-C20807…S (750W)
ECMA-C20907…S (750W) HOUSING: AMP (1-172161-9)
ECMA-G21303…S (300W)
ECMA-E21305…S (500W)
ECMA-G21306…S (600W)
ECMA-GM1306PS (600W)
ECMA-G21309…S (900W)
ECMA-GM1309PS (900W)
ECMA-C21010…S (1000W)
ECMA-C20910…S (1000W) B
ECMA-E21310…S (1000W)
ECMA-E21315…S (1500W)
ECMA-C21020…S (2000W)
ECMA-E21320…S (2000W)
3106A-20-29S
ECMA-E21820…S (2000W)
ECMA-E21830…S (3000W)
ECMA-F21830…S (3000W)

Terminal BRAID
Reserve Reserve Reserve Reserve
Identificati T+ T- +5V GND
d d d d SHELD
on
4 7 8
1
A (Blue - - - - (Red & (Black & 9
(Blue)
/Black) Red/White) Black/White)

B A B C D F G S R L

Revision June 2010 3-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

3.1.6 Cable Specifications for Servo Drive

The boxes (…) in the model names are for optional configurations. (Please refer to section
1.2 for model explanation.)
Power Cable

Servo Drive and Servo Motor Power Cable - Wire Gauge AWG (mm2)
L1c, L2c R, S, T U, V, W P ,C
1.3 2.1 0.82 2.1
ASD-B2-0121-… ECMA-C20401…S
（AWG16） （AWG14） （AWG18） （AWG14）
1.3 2.1 0.82 2.1
ASD-B2-0221-… ECMA-C20602…S
（AWG16） （AWG14） （AWG18） （AWG14）
1.3 2.1 0.82 2.1
ECMA-C20604…S
（AWG16） （AWG14） （AWG18） （AWG14）
1.3 2.1 0.82 2.1
ECMA-CM0604PS
（AWG16） （AWG14） （AWG18） （AWG14）
1.3 2.1 0.82 2.1
ASD-B2-0421-… ECMA-C20804…7
（AWG16） （AWG14） （AWG18） （AWG14）
1.3 2.1 0.82 2.1
ECMA-E21305…S
（AWG16） （AWG14） （AWG18） （AWG14）
1.3 2.1 0.82 2.1
ECMA-G21303…S
（AWG16） （AWG14） （AWG18） （AWG14）
1.3 2.1 0.82 2.1
ECMA-C20807…S
（AWG16） （AWG14） （AWG18） （AWG14）
1.3 2.1 0.82 2.1
ECMA-C20907…S
（AWG16） （AWG14） （AWG18） （AWG14）
ASD-B2-0721-…
1.3 2.1 0.82 2.1
ECMA-G21306…S
（AWG16） （AWG14） （AWG18） （AWG14）
1.3 2.1 0.82 2.1
ECMA-GM1306PS
（AWG16） （AWG14） （AWG18） （AWG14）
1.3 2.1 1.3 2.1
ECMA-C21010…S
（AWG16） （AWG14） （AWG16） （AWG14）
1.3 2.1 1.3 2.1
ECMA-C20910…S
（AWG16） （AWG14） （AWG16） （AWG14）
1.3 2.1 1.3 2.1
ASD-B2-1021-… ECMA-E21310…S
（AWG16） （AWG14） （AWG16） （AWG14）
1.3 2.1 1.3 2.1
ECMA-G21309…S
（AWG16） （AWG14） （AWG16） （AWG14）
1.3 2.1 1.3 2.1
ECMA-GM1309PS
（AWG16） （AWG14） （AWG16） （AWG14）
1.3 2.1 1.3 2.1
ASD-B2-1521-… ECMA-E21315…S
（AWG16） （AWG14） （AWG16） （AWG14）
1.3 2.1 2.1 2.1
ECMA-C21020…S
（AWG16） （AWG14） （AWG14） （AWG14）
1.3 2.1 2.1 2.1
ASD-B2-2023-… ECMA-E21320…S
（AWG16） （AWG14） （AWG14） （AWG14）
1.3 2.1 3.3 2.1
ECMA-E21820…S
（AWG16） （AWG14） （AWG12） （AWG14）
1.3 2.1 3.3 2.1
ECMA-E21830…S
（AWG16） （AWG14） （AWG12） （AWG14）
ASD-B2-3023-…
1.3 2.1 3.3 2.1
ECMA-F21830…S
（AWG16） （AWG14） （AWG12） （AWG14）

3-10 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

Encoder Cable

Encoder Cable - Wire Gauge AWG (mm2)

Servo Drive Standard Wire
Wire Size Core Number UL Rating
Length
ASD-B2-0121-… 0.13 (AWG26) 10 core (4 pair) UL2464 3m (9.84ft.)
ASD-B2-0221-… 0.13 (AWG26) 10 core (4 pair) UL2464 3m (9.84ft.)
ASD-B2-0421-… 0.13 (AWG26) 10 core (4 pair) UL2464 3m (9.84ft.)
ASD-B2-0721-… 0.13 (AWG26) 10 core (4 pair) UL2464 3m (9.84ft.)
ASD-B2-1021-… 0.13 (AWG26) 10 core (4 pair) UL2464 3m (9.84ft.)
ASD-B2-1521-… 0.13 (AWG26) 10 core (4 pair) UL2464 3m (9.84ft.)
ASD-B2-2023-… 0.13 (AWG26) 10 core (4 pair) UL2464 3m (9.84ft.)
ASD-B2-3023-… 0.13 (AWG26) 10 core (4 pair) UL2464 3m (9.84ft.)

NOTE
1) Please use shielded twisted-pair cables for wiring to prevent voltage coupling and
eliminate electrical noise and interference.
2) The shield of shielded twisted-pair cables should be connected to the SHIELD end
(terminal marked ) of the servo drive.
3) In order to prevent fire hazard and accidents, please form the wiring by following the
cable specifications outlined above.
4) The boxes (…) at the ends of the servo drive model names represent the model type of
ASDA-B2 series. For the actual model name, please refer to the ordering information of
the actual purchased product.
5) The boxes (…) in the servo motor model names are for optional configurations (keyway,
brake and oil sea).

Revision June 2010 3-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

3.2 Basic Wiring

Figure 3.4 Basic Wiring Schematic of 400W and below models (without built-in
regenerative resistor and cooling fan)

3-12 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

Figure 3.5 Basic Wiring Schematic of 750W model (with built-in regenerative resistor
but without cooling fan)

Revision June 2010 3-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

Figure 3.6 Basic Wiring Schematic of 1kW~1.5kW models (with built-in regenerative
resistor and cooling fan)

3-14 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

Figure 3.7 Basic Wiring Schematic of 2kW~3kW models (with built-in regenerative
resistor and cooling fan)

Revision June 2010 3-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

3.3 Input / Output Interface Connector - CN1

The CN1 Interface Connector provides access to three signal groups:

i General interface for the analog speed and torque control, encoder reference signal from
the motor, pulse / direction inputs, and reference voltages.
ii 8 programmable Digital Inputs (DI), can be set via parameters P2-10 ~ P2-17
iii 5 programmable Digital Outputs (DO), can be set via parameters P2-18 ~ P2-22
A detailed explanation of each group is available in Section 3.3.2, Tables 3.A, 3.B & 3.C.

3.3.1 CN1 Terminal Identification

Figure 3.8 The Layout of CN1 Drive Connector

3-16 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

CN1 Terminal Signal Identification

16 DO6+ Digital output

1 DO4+ Digital output 31 DI7- Digital input
+24V power
17 VDD output (for
2 DO3- Digital output external I/O) 32 DI6- Digital input
Analog torque
18 T_REF
Input
3 DO3+ Digital output 33 DI5- Digital input
Analog input
19 GND
signal ground
4 DO2- Digital output 34 DI3- Digital input
Analog speed
20 V_REF
input (+) Pulse applied
5 DO2+ Digital output 35 PULL HI
Encoder power
21 OA
A pulse output High-speed
6 DO1- Digital output 36 /HPULSE position pulse
Encoder (-)
22 /OA
/A pulse output
Position sign
7 DO1+ Digital output 37 SIGN
(+)
Encoder /B
23 /OB
pulse output High-speed
8 DI4- Digital input 38 HPULSE position pulse
Encoder /Z (+)
24 /OZ
pulse output
9 DI1- Digital input 39 /SIGN Position sign (-)
Encoder B pulse
25 OB
output High-speed
10 DI2- Digital input 40 /HSIGN
position sign (-)
26 DO4- Digital output
Power
11 COM+ 41 PULSE Pulse input (+)
input (12~24V)
27 DO5- Digital output
High-speed
12 DI9- Digital input 42 HSIGN position sign
28 DO5+ Digital output (+)
Encoder Z
pulse
13 OZ 43 /PULSE Pulse input (-)
Line-driver Analog input
output 29 GND
signal ground
Encoder Z
VDD(24V)
pulse
14 COM- power 44 OCZ
Line-driver
ground 30 DI8- Digital input output

15 DO6- Digital output

Revision June 2010 3-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

3.3.2 Signals Explanation of Connector CN1

Table 3.A General Signals

Wiring Diagram
Signal Pin No Details
(Refer to 3-3-3)
1. Motor speed command: -10V to +10V,
corresponds to -3000 ~ +3000 r/min
speed command (Factory default setting).
V_REF 20 C1
Analog 2. Motor speed command: -10V to +10V,
Signal corresponds to -3 ~ +3 rotations position
Input command (Factory default setting).
Motor torque command: -10V to +10V,
T_REF 18 corresponds to -100% to +100% rated torque C1
command.

PULSE 41 The drive can accept two different types of

pulse inputs: Open Collector and Line Driver.
/PULSE 43
Three different pulse commands can be C3/C4
Position SIGN 37
selected via parameter P1-00. Quadrature ,
Pulse /SIGN 39 CW + CCW pulse & Pulse / Direction.
Input
Should an Open Collector type of pulse be
PULL HI 35 used this terminal must be lulled high to pin C3
17.
The drive can accept two different types of
high-speed pulse inputs: +5V input and Line-
High- HPULSE 38 driver input. The max. input frequency is
speed /HPULSE 36 4MHz.
Position C4-2
Pulse HSIGN 42 Three different pulse commands can be
Input /HSIGN 40 selected via parameter P1-00. They are A
phase + B phase (Quadrature), CW pulse +
CCW pulse, and Pulse + Direction.
OA 21
/OA 22
OB 25 Encoder signal output A, B, Z (Line-driver
Position output). The motor encoder signals are C13/C14
/OB 23 available through these terminals.
Pulse
Output OZ 13
/OZ 24
Encoder signal output Z (Open-collector
OCZ 44 -
output).
VDD is the +24V source voltage provided by
VDD 17 the drive. Maximum permissible current
500mA.
COM+ is the common voltage rail of the
Power Digital Input and Digital Output signals. -
COM+ 11 Connect VDD to COM+ for source mode. For
external applied power sink mode (+12V to
COM- 14 +24V), the positive terminal should be
connected to COM+ and the negative to
COM-.

3-18 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

Wiring Diagram
Signal Pin No Details
(Refer to 3-3-3)
The polarity of VCC is with respect to Ground
Power GND 19 -
(GND).

Signals Explanation of Connector CN5

Wiring Diagram
Signal Pin No Details
(Refer to 3-3-3)
Monitor operation status: Motor
characteristics such as speed and current can
be represented by analog voltages. The drive
provides two channels (MON1 and MON2)
Analog which can be configured with the parameter
Monito MON1 1 P0-03 to output the desired characteristics.
r C2
MON2 3 Please refer to the parameter P0-03 for
Output monitoring commands and P1-04 / P1-05 for
scaling factors.
Output voltage is reference to the power
ground.

The Digital Input (DI) and Digital Output (DO) have factory default settings which
correspond to the various servo drive control modes. (See section 1.5). However, both the
DI's and DO's can be programmed independently to meet the requirements of the users.
Detailed in Tables 3.B and 3.C are the DO and DI functions with their corresponding
signal name and wiring schematic. The factory default settings of the DI and DO signals
are detailed in Table 3.F and 3.G.
All of the DI's and DO's and their corresponding pin numbers are factory set and non-
changeable, however, all of the assigned signals and control modes are user changeable.
For Example, the factory default setting of DO5 (pins 28/27) can be assigned to DO1
(pins 7/6) and vise versa.
The following Tables 3.B and 3.C detail the functions, applicable operational modes,
signal name and relevant wiring schematic of the default DI and DO signals.

Revision June 2010 3-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

Table 3.B DO Signals

Pin No.
DO Assigned Wiring Diagram
(Default) Details
Signal Control Mode (Refer to 3-3-3)
+ -
SRDY is activated when the servo drive
is ready to run. All fault and alarm
SRDY ALL 7 6
conditions, if present, have been
cleared.
Servo ready (SRDY) is "ON" where the
SON Not assigned - - servo is ready to run, NO fault / alarm
exists.
ZSPD is activated when the drive
senses the motor is equal to or below
ZSPD ALL 5 4
the Zero Speed Range setting as
defined in parameter P1-38.
TSPD is activated once the drive has
ALL detected the motor has reached the
TSPD - -
(except PT) Target Rotation Speed setting as
defined in parameter P1-39.
1. When the drive is in PT mode, TPOS
will be activated when the position
TPOS PT, PT-S, PT-T 1 26
error is equal and below the setting
value of P1-54.
TQL is activated when the drive has
TQL Not assigned - - detected that the motor has reached
the torques limits.
ALRM is activated when the drive has
detected a fault condition. (However, C5/C6/C7/C8
when Reverse limit error, Forward limit
ALRM ALL 28 27 error, Emergency stop, Serial
communication error, and
Undervoltage these fault occur, WARN
is activated first.)
BRKR is the control terminal of motor
BRKR ALL - -
brake.
OLW is activated when the servo drive
OLW ALL - - has detected that the motor has
reached the output overload level .
Servo warning output. WARN is
activated when the drive has detected
Reverse limit error, Forward limit error,
WARN ALL - -
Emergency stop, Serial communication
error, and Undervoltage these fault
conditions.
SP_CMP will be activated when the
S_CMP S, Sz - - speed error is equal and below the
setting value of P1-47.
SDO_0 ALL - - Output the status of bit00 of P4-06.
SDO_1 ALL - - Output the status of bit01 of P4-06.
SDO_2 ALL - - Output the status of bit02 of P4-06.

3-20 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

Pin No.
DO Assigned Wiring Diagram
(Default) Details
Signal Control Mode (Refer to 3-3-3)
+ -
SDO_3 ALL - - Output the status of bit03 of P4-06.
SDO_4 ALL - - Output the status of bit04 of P4-06.
SDO_5 ALL - - Output the status of bit05 of P4-06.
SDO_6 ALL - - Output the status of bit06 of P4-06.
SDO_7 ALL - - Output the status of bit07 of P4-06.
SDO_8 ALL - - Output the status of bit08 of P4-06.
SDO_9 ALL - - Output the status of bit09 of P4-06. C5/C6/C7/C8
SDO_A ALL - - Output the status of bit10 of P4-06.
SDO_B ALL - - Output the status of bit11 of P4-06.
SDO_C ALL - - Output the status of bit12 of P4-06.
SDO_D ALL - - Output the status of bit13 of P4-06.
SDO_E ALL - - Output the status of bit14 of P4-06.
SDO_F ALL - - Output the status of bit15 of P4-06.
NOTE
1) PINS 3 & 2 can TSPD when control mode S is selected.
2) The DO signals that do not have pin numbers in Tables 3.B are not default DO signals. If
the users want to use these non-default DO signals, the users need to change the settings
of parameters P2-18 ~ P2-22. The “state” of the output function may be turned ON or OFF
as it will be dependant on the settings of parameters P2-18 ~ P2-22. Please refer to section
3.3.3 for details.

Table 3.C DI Signals

DI Assigned Pin No. Wiring Diagram

Control Details
Signal Mode (Default) (Refer to 3-3-3)

SON ALL 9 Servo On. Switch servo to "Servo Ready".

A number of Faults (Alarms) can be
ARST ALL 33
cleared by activating ARST.
GAINUP ALL - Gain switching
When CCLR is activated the setting is C9/C10
CCLR PT 10 parameter P2-50 Pulse Clear Mode is C11/C12
executed.
When this signal is On and the motor
speed value is lower than the setting
ZCLAMP ALL - value of P1-38, it is used to lock the
motor in the instant position while
ZCLAMP is On.

Revision June 2010 3-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

DI Assigned Pin No. Wiring Diagram

Control Details
Signal Mode (Default) (Refer to 3-3-3)

When this signal is On, the motor is in

CMDINV T, S -
reverse rotation.
ON indicates the torque limit command is
TRQLM S, Sz 10
valid.
ON indicates the speed limit command is
SPDLM T, Tz 10
valid.
STOP - - Motor stop.
SPD0 S, Sz, 34 Select the source of speed command:
SPD1 PT-S, S-T 8 See table 3.D.

PT, T, Tz,
TCM0 34 Select the source of torque command:
PT-T
See table 3.E.
TCM1 S-T 8
Speed / Position mode switching
S-P PT-S 31
OFF: Speed, ON: Position
Speed / Torque mode switching
S-T S-T 31
OFF: Speed, ON: Torque
Torque / Position mode switching
T-P PT-T 31
OFF: Torque, ON: Position
It should be contact “b” and normally ON C9/C10
EMGS ALL 30
or a fault (ALRM) will display.
C11/C12
PT, S, T Reverse inhibit limit. It should be contact
NL(CWL) 32 “b” and normally ON or a fault (ALRM) will
Sz, Tz display.

PT, S, T Forward inhibit limit. It should be contact

PL(CCWL) 31 “b” and normally ON or a fault (ALRM) will
Sz, Tz display.
Reverse operation torque limit (Torque
Not
TLLM - limit function is valid only when P1-02 is
assigned
enabled)
Forward operation torque limit (Torque
Not
TRLM - limit function is valid only when P1-02 is
assigned
enabled)
Forward JOG input. When JOGU is
JOGU ALL - activated, the motor will JOG in forward
direction.
Reverse JOG input. When JOGD is
JOGD ALL - activated, the motor will JOG in reverse
direction.
Electronic gear ratio (Numerator)
GNUM0 PT, PT-S -
selection 0 [See P2-60~P2-62]
Electronic gear ratio (Numerator)
GNUM1 PT, PT-S -
selection 1 [See P2-60~P2-62]

3-22 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

DI Assigned Pin No. Wiring Diagram

Control Details
Signal Mode (Default) (Refer to 3-3-3)

Pulses inhibit input. When the drive is in

position mode, if INHP is activated, the C9/C10
INHP PT, PT-S -
external pulse input command is not C11/C12
valid.

NOTE
1) The DI signals that do not have pin numbers in Tables 3.C are not default DI signals. If the
users want to use these non-default DI signals, the users need to change the settings of
parameters P2-10 ~ P2-17. The “state” of the output function may be turned ON or OFF as it
will be dependant on the settings of parameters P2-10 ~ P2-17. Please refer to section
3.3.3 for details.

Table 3.D Source of Speed Command

SPD1 SPD0 Parameter

S mode: analog input

OFF OFF
Sz mode: 0

OFF ON P1-09

ON OFF P1-10

ON ON P1-11

Table 3.E Source of Torque Command

TCM1 TCM0 Parameter

T mode: analog input

OFF OFF
Tz mode: 0

OFF ON P1-12

ON OFF P1-13

ON ON P1-14

The default DI and DO signals in different control mode are listed in the following table
3.F and table 3.G. Although the content of the table 3.F and table 3.G do not provide
more information than the table 3.B and table 3.C above, as each control mode is
separated and listed in different row, it is easy for user to view and can avoid confusion.
However, the Pin number of each signal can not be displayed in the table 3.F and table
3.G.

Revision June 2010 3-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

Table 3.F Default DI signals and Control modes

DI
Signal Function PT S T Sz Tz PT-S PT-T S-T
Code
SON 01 Servo On DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1
ARST 02 Reset DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5
Gain switching in
GAINUP 03 speed and position
mode
CCLR 04 Pulse clear DI2 DI2 DI2
ZCLAMP 05 Low speed CLAMP
Command input
CMDINV 06
reverse control
Reserved 07 Reserved
Reserved 08 Reserved
TRQLM 09 Torque limit enabled DI2 DI2
SPDLM 10 Speed limit enabled DI2 DI2
STOP 46 Motor stop
Speed command
SPD0 14 DI3 DI3 DI3 DI3
selection 0
Speed command
SPD1 15 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4
selection 1
Torque command
TCM0 16 DI3 DI3 DI3 DI3 DI5
selection 0
Torque command
TCM1 17 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI6
selection 1
Position / Speed
S-P 18 mode switching (OFF: DI7
Speed, ON: Position)
Speed / Torque mode
S-T 19 switching (OFF: DI7
Speed, ON: Torque)
Torque / Position
T-P 20 mode switching (OFF: DI7
Torque, ON: Position)
Reserved 2C Reserved
Reserved 2D Reserved
EMGS 21 Emergency stop DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8
NL(CWL) 22 Reverse inhibit limit DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6
PL(CCWL) 23 Forward inhibit limit DI7 DI7 DI7 DI7 DI7
Reserved 24 Reserved
Reverse operation
TLLM 25
torque limit

3-24 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

DI
Signal Function PT S T Sz Tz PT-S PT-T S-T
Code
Forward operation
TRLM 26
torque limit
Reserved 27 Reserved
Reserved 36 Reserved
JOGU 37 Forward JOG input
JOGD 38 Reverse JOG input
Electronic gear ratio
GNUM0 43 (Numerator) selection
0
Electronic gear ratio
GNUM1 44 (Numerator) selection
1
INHP 45 Pulse inhibit input

NOTE
1) For Pin numbers of DI1~DI8 signals, please refer to section 3.3.1.

Table 3.G Default DO signals and Control modes

DO
Signal Function PT S T Sz Tz PT-S PT-T S-T
Code
SRDY 01 Servo ready DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1
SON 02 Servo On
ZSPD 03 Zero speed DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2
TSPD 04 Speed reached DO3 DO3 DO3 DO3 DO3 DO3 DO3
Positioning
TPOS 05 DO4 DO4 DO4
completed
Reached torques
TQL 06
limits
Servo alarm output
ALRM 07 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5
(Servo fault)
Electromagnetic
BRKR 08 DO4 DO4 DO4 DO4
brake
Output overload
OLW 10
warning
Servo warning
WARN 11
output
Reverse software
SNL(SCWL) 13
limit
Forward software
SPL(SCCWL) 14
limit

Revision June 2010 3-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

DO
Signal Function PT S T Sz Tz PT-S PT-T S-T
Code
Speed reached
SP_OK 19
output
Output the status of
SDO_0 30
bit00 of P4-06.
Output the status of
SDO_1 31
bit01 of P4-06.
Output the status of
SDO_2 32
bit02 of P4-06.
Output the status of
SDO_3 33
bit03 of P4-06.
Output the status of
SDO_4 34
bit04 of P4-06.
Output the status of
SDO_5 35
bit05 of P4-06.
Output the status of
SDO_6 36
bit06 of P4-06.
Output the status of
SDO_7 37
bit07 of P4-06.
Output the status of
SDO_8 38
bit08 of P4-06.
Output the status of
SDO_9 39
bit09 of P4-06.
Output the status of
SDO_A 3A
bit10 of P4-06.
Output the status of
SDO_B 3B
bit11 of P4-06.
Output the status of
SDO_C 3C
bit12 of P4-06.
Output the status of
SDO_D 3D
bit13 of P4-06.
Output the status of
SDO_E 3E
bit14 of P4-06.
Output the status of
SDO_F 3F
bit15 of P4-06.

NOTE
1) For Pin numbers of DO1~DO6 signals, please refer to section 3.3.1.

3-26 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

3.3.3 Wiring Diagrams of I/O Signals (CN1)

The valid voltage range of analog input command in speed and torque mode is -10V
~+10V. The command value can be set via relevant parameters.

C1: Speed / Torque analog signal input C2: Analog monitor output (MON1, MON2)

There are two kinds of pulse inputs, Line driver input and Open-collector input. Max.
input pulse frequency of Line driver input is 500kpps and max. input pulse frequency of
Open-collector input is 200kpps.

C3-1: Pulse input, for the use of internal C3-2: Pulse input, for the use of external
power supply (Open-collector input) power supply (Open-collector input)

¾ Caution: Do not use dual power supply. Failure to observe this caution may result in
damage to the servo drive and servo motor.

Revision June 2010 3-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

C4-1: Pulse input (Line driver) It requires 5V power supply only. Never apply a 24V power
supply.

C4-2: High-speed pulse input (Line driver). It requires 5V power supply only. Never apply
a 24V power supply.

¾ Caution: Ensure that the ground terminal of the controller and the servo drive should be
connected to each other.

3-28 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

Be sure to connect a diode when the drive is applied to inductive load.

(Permissible current: 40mA, Instantaneous peak current: max. 100mA)

C5: Wiring of DO signal, for the use of C6: Wiring of DO signal, for the use of
internal power supply, general load internal power supply, inductive load

C7: Wiring of DO signal, for the use of C8: Wiring of DO signal, for the use of
external power supply, general load external power supply, inductive load

Revision June 2010 3-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

Use a relay or open-collector transistor to input signal.

NPN transistor with multiple emitter fingers (SINK Mode)

C9: Wiring of DI signal, for the use of C10: Wiring of DI signal, for the use of external
internal power supply power supply

PNP transistor with multiple emitter fingers (SOURCE Mode)

C11: Wiring of DI signal, for the use of C12: Wiring of DI signal, for the use of external
internal power supply power supply

¾ Caution: Do not use dual power supply. Failure to observe this caution may result in
damage to the servo drive and servo motor.

3-30 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

C13: Encoder output signal (Line driver) C14: Encoder output signal (Photocoupler)

C15: Encoder OCZ output (Open-collector Z-pulse output)

Revision June 2010 3-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

3.3.4 User-defined DI and DO signals

If the default DI and DO signals could not be able to fulfill users’ requirements, there are
still user-defined DI and DO signals. The setting method is easy and they are all defined
via parameters. The user-defined DI and DO signals are defined via parameters P2-10 to
P2-17 P2-36 and P2-18 to P2-22 and P-37. Please refer to the following Table 3.H for the
settings.

Table 3.H User-defined DI and DO signals

Signal Name Pin No. Parameter Signal Name Pin No. Parameter
DI1- CN1-9 P2-10 DO1+ CN1-7
P2-18
DI2- CN1-10 P2-11 DO1- CN1-6
DI3- CN1-34 P2-12 DO2+ CN1-5
P2-19
DI4- CN1-8 P2-13 DO2- CN1-4
DI DI5- CN1-33 P2-14 DO3+ CN1-3
P2-20
DI6- CN1-32 P2-15 DO3- CN1-2
DO
DI7- CN1-31 P2-16 DO4+ CN1-1
P2-21
DI8- CN1-30 P2-17 DO4- CN1-26
DI9 CN1-12 P2-36 DO5+ CN1-28
P2-22
DO5- CN1-27
DO6+ CN1-16
P2-37
DO6- CN1-15

3-32 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

3.4 Encoder Connector CN2

Figure 3.9 The layout of CN2 Drive Connector

Figure 3.10 The layout of CN2 Motor Connector

Quick Connector Military Connector

HOUSING: AMP (1-172161-9) 3106A-20-29S

CN2 Terminal Signal Identification

Drive Connector Motor Connector

Terminal Military Quick

PIN No. Description Color
Identification Connector Connector

Serial communication
4 T+ A 1 Blue
signal input / output (+)

Serial communication
5 T- B 4 Blue/Black
signal input / output (-)

- - Reserved - - -
- - Reserved - - -
Red &
14,16 +5V +5V power supply S 7
Red/White
Black &
13,15 GND Ground R 8
Black/White
- - Shielding L 9 -

Revision June 2010 3-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

3.5 Serial Communication Connector CN3

3.5.1 CN3 Terminal Layout and Identification

The servo drive can be connected to a PC or controller via a serial communication
connector. Users can operate the servo drive through PC software supplied by Delta
(contact to the dealer). The communication connector/port of Delta servo drive can
provide three common serial communication interfaces: RS-232, RS-485, and RS-422
connection. RS-232 is mostly be used but is somewhat limited. The maximum cable
length for an RS-232 connection is 15 meters (50 feet). Using RS-485 or RS-422 interface
can allow longer distance for transmission and support multiple drives to be connected
simultaneously.

CN3 Drive Connector

CN3 Terminal Signal Identification

Terminal
PIN No. Signal Name Description
Identification
1 Grounding GND Ground
RS-232 data For data transmission of the servo drive.
2 RS-232-TX
transmission Connected to the RS-232 interface of PC.
3 - - Reserved
For data receiving of the servo drive.
4 RS-232 data receiving RS-232_RX
Connected to the RS-232 interface of PC.
RS-485 data For data transmission of the servo drive
5 RS-485(+)
transmission (differential line driver + end)
RS-485 data For data transmission of the servo drive
6 RS-485(-)
transmission (differential line driver - end)

NOTE
1) For the connection of RS-485, please refer to page 8.3.
2) There are two kinds of IEEE1394 communication cables available on the market. If the user
uses one kind of cable, which its GND terminal (Pin 1) and its shielding is short-circuited,
the communication may be damaged. Never connect the case of the terminal to the ground
of this kind of communication cable.

3-34 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

3.5.2 Connection between PC and Connector CN3

Revision June 2010 3-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

3.6 Standard Connection Example

Please note:
*1 Please refer to C3 ~ C4 wiring diagrams in
section 3.3.3 (on page 3-24 and 3-25).
*2 Please refer to C3 ~ C4 wiring diagrams in
section 3.3.3 (on page 3-24 and 3-25).
*3 Please refer to C9 ~ C12 wiring diagrams
(SINK / SOURCE mode) in section 3.3.3
(on page 3-27).
*4 400W and below drives do not provide
built-in regenerative resistor.
*5 The coil of brake has no polarity.

3-36 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

3.6.2 Speed Control Mode

Please note:
*1 Please refer to C9 ~ C12 wiring diagrams
(SINK / SOURCE mode) in section 3.3.3
(on page 3-27).
*2 400W and below drives do not provide
built-in regenerative resistor.
*3 The coil of brake has no polarity.

Revision June 2010 3-37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring

3.6.3 Torque Control Mode

Please note:
*1 Please refer to C9 ~ C12 wiring
diagrams (SINK / SOURCE mode) in
section 3.3.3 (on page 3-27).
*2 400W and below drives do not provide
built-in regenerative resistor.
*3 The coil of brake has no polarity.

3-38 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 4 Display and Operation

This chapter describes the basic operation of the digital keypad and the features it offers.

4.1 Description of the Digital Keypad

The digital keypad includes the display panel and function keys. The Figure 4.1 shows all of
the features of the digital keypad and an overview of their functions.

Figure 4.1

Name Function
The LCD Display (5-digit, 7-step display panel) shows the monitor codes,
LCD Display
parameter settings and operation values of the AC servo drive.
Charge LED The Charge LED lights to indicate the power is applied to the circuit.
MODE Key. Pressing MODE key can enter or exit different parameter
MODE Key
groups, and switch between Monitor mode and Parameter mode.
SHIFT Key. Pressing SHIFT key can scrolls through parameter groups. After
a parameter is selected and its value displayed, pressing SHIFT key can
SHIFT Key
move the cursor to the left and then change parameter settings (blinking
digits) by using arrow keys.
UP and DOWN arrow Key. Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow key can scroll
UP and DOWN
through and change monitor codes, parameter groups and various
Key
parameter settings.
SET Key. Pressing the SET key can display and save the parameter groups,
the various parameter settings. In monitor mode, pressing SET key can
switch decimal or hexadecimal display. In parameter mode, pressing SET
SET Key
key can enter into parameter setting mode. During diagnosis operation,
pressing SET key can execute the function in the last step. (The parameter
settings changes are not effective until the SET key is pressed.)

Revision June 2010 4-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 4 Display and Operation

4.2 Display Flowchart

Figure 4.2 Keypad Operation

1. When the power is applied to the AC servo drive, the LCD display will show the monitor
function codes for approximately one second, then enter into the monitor mode.
2. In monitor mode, pressing MODE key can enter into parameter mode. In parameter
mode, pressing MODE key can return to monitor mode.

3. No matter working in which mode, when an alarm occurs, the system will enter into
fault mode immediately. In fault mode, pressing MODE key can switch to other modes.
In other modes, if no key is pressed for over 20 seconds, the system will return to fault
mode automatically.
4. In monitor mode, pressing UP or DOWN arrow key can switch monitor parameter code.
At this time, monitor display symbol will display for approximately one second.
5. In monitor mode, pressing MODE key can enter into parameter mode, pressing the
SHIFT key can switch parameter group and pressing UP or DOWN arrow key can change
parameter group code.
6. In parameter mode, the system will enter into the setting mode immediately after the
Set key is pressed. The LCD display will display the corresponding setting value of this
parameter simultaneously. Then, users can use UP or DOWN arrow key to change
parameter value or press MODE key to exit and return back to the parameter mode.
7. In parameter setting mode, the users can move the cursor to left by pressing the SHIFT
key and change the parameter settings (blinking digits) by pressing the UP or DOWN
arrow key.
8. After the setting value change is completed, press SET key to save parameter settings
or execute command.
9. When the parameter setting is completed, LCD display will show the end code
“SAVED“ and automatically return back to parameter mode.

4-2 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 4 Display and Operation

4.3 Status Display

4.3.1 Save Setting Display

After the SET key is pressed, LCD display will show the following display messages for
approx. one second according to different status.

Display Message Description

The setting value is saved correctly. [Saved)

This parameter is read only. Write-protected. (Read-Only)

Invalid password or no password was input. (Locked)

The setting value is error or invalid. (Out of Range)

The servo system is running and it is unable to accept

this setting value to be changed. (Servo On)
This parameter is valid after restarting the drive. (Power
On)

4.3.2 Decimal Point Display

Display Message Description
High/Low byte display. When the data is a decimal 32-bit
data, these two digits are used to show if the display is
high byte or low byte.
Negative value display. When the data is displayed in
decimal format, the most left two digits represent negative
sign no matter it is a 16-bit or 32-bit data. If the data is
displayed in hexadecimal format, it is a positive value
always and no negative sign is displayed.

4.3.3 Fault Message Display

Display Message Description
When the AC servo drive has a fault, LCD display will
display “ALnnn”. “AL” indicates the alarm and “nnn”
indicates the drive fault code. For the list of drive fault
code, please refer to parameter P0-01 or refer to Chapter
11 (Troubleshooting).

4.3.4 Polarity Setting Display

Display Message Description
Positive value display. When entering into parameter
setting mode, pressing UP or DOWN arrow key can
increase or decrease the display value. SHIFT key is used
to change the selected digit (The selected digit will
blink).

Revision June 2010 4-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 4 Display and Operation

Display Message Description

Negative value display. Continuously press SHIFT key for
two seconds and then the positive(+) or negative(-) sign
can be switched. When the setting value exceeds its
setting range, the positive(+) and negative(-) sign can not
be switched. (The negative value display is for a decimal
negative value only. There is no negative value display
for a hexadecimal negative value.)

4.3.5 Monitor Setting Display

When the AC servo drive is applied to power, the LCD display will show the monitor
function codes for approximately one second and then enter into the monitor mode. In
monitor mode, in order to change the monitor status, the users can press UP or DOWN
arrow key or change parameter P0-02 directly to specify the monitor status. When the
power is applied, the LCD display will show ASDB2 first and then display the monitor
status depending on the setting value of P0-02. For example, if the setting value of P0-02
is 4 when the power is applied, the monitor function will be input pulse number of pulse
command. After ASDB2 shows on the LCD display, the C-PLS monitor codes will display
next and then the pulse number will display after.

P0-02
Display Message Description Unit
Setting
Motor feedback pulse number (after
0 [user unit]
electronic gear ratio is set)
Input pulse number of pulse
1 command (after electronic gear [user unit]
ratio is set)
Position error counts between
2 control command pulse and [user unit]
feedback pulse
Motor feedback pulse number
3 [pulse]
(encoder unit, 1600000 pulse/rev)
Input pulse number of pulse
4 command (before electronic gear [pulse]
ratio is set) (encoder unit)
Position error counts (after
5 electronic gear ratio is set) (encoder [pulse]
unit)

6 Input frequency of pulse command [Kpps]

7 Motor rotation speed [r/min]

8 Speed input command [Volt]

9 Speed input command [r/min]

4-4 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 4 Display and Operation

P0-02
Display Message Description Unit
Setting

10 Torque input command [Volt]

11 Torque input command [%]

12 Average load [%]

13 Peak load [%]

14 Main circuit voltage [Volt]

Ratio of load inertia to Motor inertia

15 (Please note that if the display is [0.1times]
130, it indicates that the actual
inertia is 13.0)

16 IGBT temperature [oC]

Resonance frequency (The low byte

is the first resonance point and the
17 [Hz]
high byte is the second resonance
point.)

Absolute pulse number relative to

encoder (use Z phase as home). The
18 value of Z phase home point is 0, -
and it can be the value from -5000
to +5000 pulses.

The following table lists the display examples of monitor value:

Display Message Description

Decimal display. When the actual value is
(Dec.) 16-bit 1234, the display is 01234.
Data Hexadecimal display. When the actual value is
(Hex.) 0x1234, the display is 1234.

(Dec. High Byte) Decimal display. When the actual value is

1234567890, the display of high byte is
(Dec. Low Byte) 1234.5 and the display of low byte is 67890.
32-bit
Data
(Hex. High Byte) Hexadecimal display. When the actual value is
0x12345678, the display of high byte is h1234
(Hex. Low Byte) and the display of low byte is L5678.

Negative value display. When the actual value is -

12345, the display is 1.2.345. (The negative value
display is displayed to indicate a decimal negative
value. There is no negative value display for a
hexadecimal negative value.)

Revision June 2010 4-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 4 Display and Operation

NOTE

1) Dec. represents Decimal display and Hex. represents Hexadecimal display.

2) The above display methods are both available in monitor mode and parameter setting mode.
3) All monitor variables are 32-bit data. The users can switch to high byte or low byte and display
format (Dec. or Hex.) freely. Regarding the parameters listed in Chapter 8, for each
parameter, only one kind of display format is available and cannot be changed.

4-6 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 4 Display and Operation

4.4 General Function Operation

4.4.1 Fault Code Display Operation

After entering the parameter mode P4-00 to P4-04 (Fault Record), press SET key to display
the corresponding fault code history for the parameter.

Figure 4.3

Revision June 2010 4-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 4 Display and Operation

4.4.2 JOG Operation

After entering parameter mode P4-05, the users can follow the following steps to perform
JOG operation. (Please also refer to Figure 4.4).

Step1. Press the SET key to display the JOG speed. (The default value is 20 r/min).

Step2. Press the UP or DOWN arrow keys to increase or decrease the desired JOG speed.
(This also can be undertaken by using the SHIFT key to move the cursor to the
desired unit column (the effected number will blink) then changed using the UP
and DOWN arrow keys. The example display in Figure 4.4 is adjusted as 100
r/min.)

Step3. Press the SET key when the desired JOG speed is set. The Servo Drive will display
"JOG".

Step4. Press the UP or DOWN arrow keys to jog the motor either CCW or CW. The motor
will only rotate while the arrow key is activated.

Step5. To change JOG speed again, press the MODE key. The servo Drive will display "P4 -
05". Press the SET key and the JOG speed will displayed again. Refer back to #2
and #3 to change speed.

NOTE

1) JOG operation is effective only when Servo On (when the servo drive is enabled).

Figure 4.4

4-8 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 4 Display and Operation

4.4.3 Force Output Control Operation

For testing, the digital outputs can be forced to be activated (ON) or inactivated (OFF) by
using parameter P2-08 and P4-06. First, set P2-08 to 406 to enable the force output
control function and then using P4-06 to force the digital outputs to be activated. Follow
the setting method in Figure 4.5 to enter into Force Output Control operation mode.
When P4-06 is set to 2, the digital output, DO2 is activated. When P4-06 is set to 7, the
digital outputs, DO1, DO2 and DO3 are both activated. The parameter setting value of P4-
06 is not retained when power is off. After re-power the servo drive, all digital outputs will
return to the normal status. If P2-08 is set to 400, it also can switch the Force Output
Control operation mode to normal Digital Output (DO) Control operation mode.
The DO function and status is determined by P2-18 to P2-22. This function is enabled
only when Servo Off (the servo drive is disabled).
Figure 4.5

NOTE

1) As the display of P4-06 is hexadecimal, 0(zero) of the fifth digit will not show on the LED
display.

Revision June 2010 4-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 4 Display and Operation

4.4.4 DI Diagnosis Operation

Following the setting method in Figure 4.6 can perform DI diagnosis operation (parameter
P4-07, Input Status). According to the ON and OFF status of the digital inputs DI1 to DI9,
the corresponding status will display on the servo drive LED display. When the Bit is set to
“1”, it means that the corresponding digital input signal is ON. (Please also refer to Figure
4.6)
For example:

Suppose that the servo drive LED display is “1E1”.

“E” is hexadecimal, which is equal to “1110” in binary system, and it means that the
digital inputs DI6 ~ DI8 are ON.
Figure 4.6

(Hexadecimal Display)

4-10 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 4 Display and Operation

4.4.5 DO Diagnosis Operation

Following the setting method in Figure 4.7 can perform DO diagnosis operation
(parameter P4-09, Output Status Display). According to the ON and OFF status of the
digital outputs DO1 to DO6, the corresponding status will display on the servo drive LED
display. When the Bit is set to “1”, it means that the corresponding digital output signal is
ON. (Please also refer to Figure 4.7)

For example:
Suppose that the servo drive LED display is “3F”.
“F” is hexadecimal, which is equal to “1111” in binary system, and it means that the
digital outputs DO1 ~ DO4 are ON.
Figure 4.7

(Hexadecimal Display)

Revision June 2010 4-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 4 Display and Operation

This page intentionally left blank.

4-12 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure

This chapter, which is divided into two parts, describes trial run for servo drive and motor.
One part is to introduce the trial run without load, and the other part is to introduce trial run
with load. Ensure to complete the trial run without load first before performing the trial run
with load.

5.1 Inspection without Load

In order to prevent accidents and avoid damaging the servo drive and mechanical system, the
trial run should be performed under no load condition (no load connected, including
disconnecting all couplings and belts). Do not run servo motor while it is connected to load or
mechanical system because the unassembled parts on motor shaft may easily disassemble
during running and it may damage mechanical system or even result in personnel injury. After
removing the load or mechanical system from the servo motor, if the servo motor can runs
normally following up the normal operation procedure (when trial run without load is
completed), then the users can connect to the load and mechanical system to run the servo
motor.

¾ In order to prevent accidents, the initial trial run for servo motor should be conducted
under no load conditions (separate the motor from its couplings and belts).
¾ Caution: Please perform trial run without load first and then perform trial run with load
connected. After the servo motor is running normally and regularly without load, then
run servo motor with load connected. Ensure to perform trial run in this order to prevent
unnecessary danger.

Revision June 2010 5-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure

After power in connected to AC servo drive, the charge LED will light and it indicates that AC
servo drive is ready. Please check the followings before trial run:

Item Content
z Inspect the servo drive and servo motor to insure they were not
damaged.
z To avoid an electric shock, be sure to connect the ground terminal of
servo drive to the ground terminal of control panel.
z Before making any connection, wait 10 minutes for capacitors to
discharge after the power is disconnected, alternatively, use an
appropriate discharge device to discharge.
z Ensure that all wiring terminals are correctly insulated.
z Ensure that all wiring is correct or damage and or malfunction may
Inspection before result.
operation
z Visually check to ensure that there are not any unused screws, metal
(Control power is strips, or any conductive or inflammable materials inside the drive.
not applied)
z Never put inflammable objects on servo drive or close to the external
regenerative resistor.
z Make sure control switch is OFF.
z If the electromagnetic brake is being used, ensure that it is correctly
wired.
z If required, use an appropriate electrical filter to eliminate noise to the
servo drive.
z Ensure that the external applied voltage to the drive is correct and
matched to the controller.
z Ensure that the cables are not damaged, stressed excessively or loaded
heavily. When the motor is running, pay close attention on the
connection of the cables and notice that if they are damaged, frayed or
over extended.
z Check for abnormal vibrations and sounds during operation. If the
servo motor is vibrating or there are unusual noises while the motor is
running, please contact the dealer or manufacturer for assistance.
z Ensure that all user-defined parameters are set correctly. Since the
Inspection during characteristics of various machinery equipment are different, in order
operation to avoid accident or cause damage, do not adjust the parameter
(Control power is abnormally and ensure the parameter setting is not an excessive value.
applied)） z Ensure to reset some parameters when the servo drive is off (Please
refer to Chapter 7). Otherwise, it may result in malfunction.
z If there is no contact sound or there be any unusual noises when the
relay of the servo drive is operating, please contact your distributor for
assistance or contact with Delta.
z Check for abnormal conditions of the power indicators and LED display.
If there is any abnormal condition of the power indicators and LED
display, please contact your distributor for assistance or contact with
Delta.

5-2 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure

5.2 Applying Power to the Drive

The users please observe the following steps when applying power supply to the servo drive.
1. Please check and confirm the wiring connection between the drive and motor is correct.
1) Terminal U, V, W and FG (frame ground) must connect to Red, White, Black and Green
cables separately (U: Red, V: White, W: Black, FG: Green). If not connect to the
specified cable and terminal, then the drive cannot control motor. The motor
grounding lead, FG must connect to grounding terminal. For more information of
cables, please refer to section 3.1.
2) Ensure to connect encoder cable to CN2 connector correctly. If the users only desire
to execute JOG operation, it is not necessary to make any connection to CN1 and CN3
connector. For more information of the connection of CN2 connector, please refer to
Section 3.1 and 3.4.

¾ Do not connect the AC input power (R, S, T) to the (U, V, W) output terminals. This will
damage the AC servo drive.

2. Main circuit wiring

Connect power to the AC servo. For three-phase input power connection and single-phase
input power connection, please refer to Section 3.1.3.

3. Turn the Power On

The Power includes control circuit power (L1c, L2c) and main circuit power (R, S, T). When
the power is on, the normal display should be shown as the following figure:

As the default settings of digital input signal, DI6, DI7 and DI8 are Reverse Inhibit Limit
(NL), Forward Inhibit Limit (PL) and Emergency Stop (EMGS) respectively, if the users do not
want to use the default settings of DI6~DI8, the users can change their settings by using
parameters P2-15 to P2-17 freely. When the setting value of parameters P2-15 to P2-17 is
0, it indicates the function of this DI signal is disabled. For more information of
parameters P2-15 to P2-17, please refer to Chapter 7 “Parameters”.

If the parameter P0-02 is set as motor speed (06), the normal display should be shown as
the following figure:

If there is no text or character displayed on the LED display, please check if the voltage of
the control circuit terminal (L1c and L2c) is over low.

Revision June 2010 5-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure

1) When display shows:

Over voltage:
The main circuit voltage has exceeded its maximum allowable value or input power is
error (Incorrect power input).
Corrective Actions:
„ Use voltmeter to check whether the input voltage falls within the rated input
voltage.

„ Use voltmeter to check whether the input voltage is within the specified limit.

2) When display shows:

Encoder error:

Check if the wiring is correct. Check if the encoder wiring (CN2) of servo motor is loose
or incorrect.
Corrective Actions:
„ Check if the users perform wiring recommended in the user manual.
„ Examine the encoder connector and cable.

„ Inspect whether wire is loose or not.

„ Check if the encoder is damaged.

3) When display shows:

Emergency stop activated:

Please check if any of digital inputs DI1~DI9 signal is set to “Emergency Stop” (EMGS).

Corrective Actions:
„ If it does not need to use “Emergency Stop (EMGS)” as input signal, the users only
need to confirm that if all of the digital inputs DI1~DI8 are not set to “Emergency

5-4 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure

Stop (EMGS)”. (The setting value of parameter P2-10 to P2-17 and P2-36 is not set
to 21.)
„ If it is necessary to use “Emergency Stop (EMGS)” as input signal, the users only
need to confirm that which of digital inputs DI1~DI9 is set to “Emergency Stop
(EMGS)” and check if the digital input signal is ON (It should be activated).

4) When display shows:

Reverse limit switch error:

Please check if any of digital inputs DI1~DI9 signal is set to “Reverse inhibit limit (NL)”
and check if the signal is ON or not.
Corrective Actions:
„ If it does not need to use “Reverse inhibit limit (NL)” as input signal, the users only
need to confirm that if all of the digital inputs DI1~DI9 are not set to “Reverse
inhibit limit (NL)”. (The setting value of parameter P2-10 to P2-17 and P2-36 is not
set to 22.)
„ If it is necessary to use “Reverse inhibit limit (NL)” as input signal, the users only
need to confirm that which of digital inputs DI1~DI9 is set to “Reverse inhibit limit
(NL)” and check if the digital input signal is ON (It should be activated).

5) When display shows:

Forward limit switch error:

Please check if any of digital inputs DI1~DI9 signal is set to “Forward inhibit limit (PL)”
and check if the signal is ON or not.

Corrective Actions:
„ If it is no need to use “Forward inhibit limit (PL)” as input signal, the users only
need to confirm that if all of the digital inputs DI1~DI9 are not set to “Forward
inhibit limit (PL)”. (The setting value of parameter P2-10 to P2-17 and P2-36 is not
set to 23.)

Revision June 2010 5-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure

„ If it is necessary to use “Forward inhibit limit (PL)” as input signal, the users only
need to confirm that which of digital inputs DI1~DI9 is set to “Forward inhibit limit
(PL)” and check if the digital input signal is ON (It should be activated).

When “Digital Input 1 (DI1)” is set to Servo On (SON), if DI1 is set to ON (it indicates that
Servo On (SON) function is enabled) and the following fault message shows on the
display:

6) When display shows:

Overcurrent:
Corrective Actions:
„ Check the wiring connections between the servo drive and motor.
„ Check if the circuit of the wiring is closed.
„ Remove the short-circuited condition and avoid metal conductor being exposed.

7) When display shows:

Undervoltage:

Corrective Actions:
„ Check whether the wiring of main circuit input voltage is normal.
„ Use voltmeter to check whether input voltage of main circuit is normal.
„ Use voltmeter to check whether the input voltage is within the specified
specification.

NOTE

1) If there are any unknown fault codes and abnormal display when applying power to the drive
or servo on is activated (without giving any command), please inform the distributor or contact
with Delta for assistance.

5-6 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure

5.3 JOG Trial Run without Load

It is very convenient to use JOG trial run without load to test the servo drive and motor as it
can save the wiring. The external wiring is not necessary and the users only need to connect
the digital keypad to the servo drive. For safety, it is recommended to set JOG speed at low
speed. Please refer to the following steps to perform JOG trial run without load.
STEP 1: Turn the drive ON through software. Ensure that the setting value of parameter P2-
30 should be set to 1 (Servo On).
STEP 2: Set parameter P4-05 as JOG speed (unit: r/min). After the desired JOG speed is set,
and then press SET key, the drive will enter into JOG operation mode automatically
STEP 3: The users can press UP and DOWN key to change JOG speed and press SHIFT key to
adjust the digit number of the displayed value.
STEP 4: Pressing SET key can determine the speed of JOG operation.

STEP 5: Pressing UP key and the servo motor will run in CCW direction. After releasing UP key,
the motor will stop running.
STEP 6: Pressing DOWN key and the servo motor will run in CW direction. After releasing
DOWN key, the motor will stop running.
N(CW) and P(CCW) Definition:
CCW (Counterclockwise): when facing the servo motor shaft, CCW is reverse running.
CW (Clockwise): when facing the servo motor shaft, CW is forward running.
STEP 7: When pressing MODE key, it can exit JOG operation mode.

Revision June 2010 5-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure

In the example below, the JOG speed is adjusted from 20r/min (Default setting) to 100r/min.

5-8 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure

5.4 Speed Trial Run without Load

Before speed trial run, fix and secure the motor as possible to avoid the danger from the
reacting force when motor speed changes.

STEP 1:

Set the value of parameter P1-01 to 02 and it is speed (S) control mode. After selecting the
operation mode as speed (S) control mode, please restart the drive as P1-01 is effective only
after the servo drive is restarted (after switching power off and on).

STEP 2:

In speed control mode, the necessary Digital Inputs are listed as follows:
Parameter Setting
Digital Input Sign Function Description CN1 PIN No.
Value
DI1 P2-10=101 SON Servo On DI1-=9
DI2 P2-11=109 TRQLM Torque limit enabled DI2-=10
DI3 P2-12=114 SPD0 Speed command selection DI3-=34
DI4 P2-13=115 SPD1 Speed command selection DI4-=8
DI5 P2-14=102 ARST Reset DI5-=33
DI6 P2-15=0 Disabled This DI function is disabled -
DI7 P2-16=0 Disabled This DI function is disabled -
DI8 P2-17=0 Disabled This DI function is disabled -
DI9 P2-36=0 Disabled This DI function is disabled -

By default, DI6 is the function of reverse inhibit limit, DI7 is the function of forward inhibit
limit and DI6 is the function of emergency stop (DI8), if the users do not set the setting value
of parameters P2-15 to P2-17 and P2-36 to 0 (Disabled), the faults (ALE13, 14 and 15) will
occur (For the information of fault messages, please refer to Chapter 10). Therefore, if the
users do not need to use these three digit inputs, please set the setting value of parameters
P2-15 to P2-17 and P2-36 to 0 (Disabled) in advance.
All the digital inputs of Delta ASDA-B2 series are user-defined, and the users can set the DI
signals freely. Ensure to refer to the definitions of DI signals before defining them (For the
description of DI signals, please refer to Table 7.A in Chapter 7). If any alarm code displays
after the setting is completed, the users can restart the drive or set DI5 to be activated to
clear the fault. Please refer to section 5.2.

Revision June 2010 5-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure

The speed command is selected by SPD0, SPD1. Please refer to the following table:

Speed DI signal of CN1

Command Source Content Range
Command No.
SPD1 SPD0
External analog Voltage between V-REF -10V ~ +10V
S1 0 0
command and GND
S2 0 1 P1-09 -50000 ~ 50000
S3 1 0 Internal parameter P1-10 -50000 ~ 50000
S4 1 1 P1-11 -50000 ~ 50000

0: indicates OFF (Normally Open); 1: indicates ON (Normally Closed)

The range of internal parameter is from -50000 to 50000.
Setting value of speed command = Setting range x unit (0.1 r/min).
For example:
If P1-09 is set to +30000, the setting value of speed command = +30000 x 0.1 r/min = +3000
r/min.

The settings of speed command:

P1-09 is set to 30000 Input value

Rotation direction
command
P1-10 is set to 1000 + CW
P1-11 is set to -30000 - CCW

STEP 3:

1. The users can use DI1 to enable the servo drive (Servo ON).

2. If DI3 (SPD0) and DI4 (SPD1) are OFF both, it indicates S1 command is selected. At this
time, the motor is operating according to external analog command.
3. If only DI3 is ON (SPD0), it indicates S2 command (P1-09 is set to 3000) is selected, and
the motor speed is 3000r/min at this time.
4. If only DI4 is ON (SPD1), it indicates S3 command (P1-10 is set to 100) is selected, and
the motor speed is 100r/min at this time.
5. If DI3 (SPD0) and DI4 (SPD1) are ON both, it indicates S4 command (P1-11 is set to -
3000) is selected, and the motor speed is -3000r/min at this time.
6. Repeat the action of (3), (4), (5) freely.

7. When the users want to stop the speed trial run, use DI1 to disable the servo drive
(Servo OFF).

5-10 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure

5.5 Tuning Procedure

Estimate the ratio of Load Inertia to Servo Motor Inertia (J_load /J_motor): JOG Mode

Tuning Procedure Display

1. After wiring is completed, when power in connected to the AC servo
drive, the right side display will show on the LCD display.
2. Press MODE key to enter into parameter mode.

3. Press SHIFT key twice to select parameter group.

4. Press UP key to view each parameter and select parameter P2-17.

5. Press SET key to display the parameter value as shown on the right
side.
6. Press SHIFT key twice to change the parameter values. Use UP key to
cycle through the available settings and then press SET key to
determine the parameter settings.
7. Press UP key to view each parameter and select parameter P2-30.

8. Press SET key to display the parameter value as shown on the right
side.
9. Select parameter value 1. Use UP key to cycle through the available
settings.
10. At this time, the servo drive is ON and the right side display will
appear next.
11. Press DOWN key three times to select the ratio of Load Inertia to
Servo Motor Inertia (J_load /J_motor).
12. Display the current ratio of Load Inertia to Servo Motor Inertia (J_load
/J_motor). (5.0 is default setting.)
13. Press MODE key to select parameter mode.

14. Press SHIFT key twice to select parameter group.

15. Press UP key to select user parameter P4-05.

16. Press SET key and JOG speed 20r/min will be displayed. Press UP and
DOWN key to increase and decrease JOG speed. To press SHIFT key
one time can add one digit number.

17. Select desired JOG speed, press SET key and it will show the right
side display.
18. Pressing UP key is forward rotation and pressing DOWN key is reverse rotation.
19. Execute JOG operation in low speed first. After the machine is running smoothly, then
execute JOG operation in high speed.

Revision June 2010 5-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure

Tuning Procedure Display

20. The ratio of Load Inertia to Servo Motor Inertia (J_load /J_motor) cannot be shown in the
display of JOG parameter P4-05 operation. Please press MODE key twice continuously and
the users can see the ratio of Load Inertia to Servo Motor Inertia (J_load /J_motor). Then,
execute JOG operation again, press MODE key once and press SET key twice to view the
display on the keypad. Check if the value of J_load /J_motor is adjusted to a fixed value
and displayed on the keypad after acceleration and deceleration repeatedly.

5.5.1 Tuning Flowchart

5-12 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure

5.5.2 Load Inertia Estimation Flowchart

Revision June 2010 5-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure

5.5.3 Auto Mode Tuning Flowchart

Set P2-32 to 1 (1: Auto Mode [Continuous adjustment] )
The servo drive will continuously estimate the system inertia, save the measured load
inertia value automatically and memorized in P1-37 every 30 minutes by referring to the
frequency response settings of P2-31.
P2-31 : Auto Mode Stiffness Setting (Default setting: 80)
In Auto mode and Semi-Auto mode, the speed loop frequency response settings are as
follows:

1 ~ 50Hz : Low stiffness and low frequency response

51 ~ 250Hz : Medium stiffness and medium frequency response
251 ~ 550Hz : High stiffness and high frequency response
Adjust P2-31: Increase the setting value of P2-31 to enhance the stiffness or reduce the
noise. Continuously perform the adjustment until the satisfactory performance is
achieved.

5-14 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure

5.5.4 Semi-Auto Mode Tuning Flowchart

Set P2-32 to 2 (2: Semi-Auto Mode [Non-continuous adjustment] )
The servo drive will continuously perform the adjustment for a period of time. After the
system inertia becomes stable, it will stop estimating the system inertia, save the
measured load inertia value automatically, and memorized in P1-37. When switching from
other modes, such as Manual Mode or Auto Mode, to Semi-Auto Mode, the servo drive will
perform continuous adjustment for estimating the load inertia (P1-37) again. The servo
drive will refer to the frequency response settings of P2-31 when estimating the system
inertia.
P2-31 : Auto Mode Stiffness Setting (Default setting: 80)
In Auto mode and Semi-Auto mode, the speed loop frequency response settings are as
follows:

1 ~ 50Hz : Low stiffness and low frequency response

51 ~ 250Hz : Medium stiffness and medium frequency response
251 ~ 550Hz : High stiffness and high frequency response
Adjust P2-31: Increase the setting value of P2-31 to enhance the frequency response or
reduce the noise.Continuously perform the adjustment until the satisfactory performance
is achieved.

Revision June 2010 5-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure

NOTE

1) When bit0 of P2-33 is set to 1, it indicates that the system inertia estimation of semi-auto mode has been
completed and the measured load inertia value is saved and memorized in P1-37 automatically.

2) If reset bit0 of P2-33 to 0, it will start estimating the system inertia again.

5-16 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure

5.5.5 Limit of Load Inertia Estimation

The accel. / decel. time for reaching 2000r/min must be below 1 second.
The rotation speed must be above 200r/min.
The load inertia must be 100 multiple or less of motor inertia.
The change of external force and the inertia ratio can not be too much.
In Auto Mode (P2-32 is set to 1), the measured load inertia value will be saved
automatically and memorized in P1-37 every 30 minutes. In Semi-Auto Mode, it will stop
estimating the load inertia after a period of continuous adjustment time when the system
inertia becomes stable. The measured load inertia value will be saved automatically and
memorized in P1-37 when load inertia estimation is stopped.

Revision June 2010 5-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure

NOTE

1) Parameters P2-44 and P2-46 are used to set notch filter attenuation rate. If the resonance can
not be suppressed when the setting values of P2-44 and P2-46 are set to 32bB (the maximum
value), please decrease the speed loop frequency response. After setting P2-47, the users can
check the setting values of P2-44 and P2-46. If the setting value of P2-44 is not 0, it indicates
that one resonance frequency exists in the system and then the users can read P2-43, i.e. the
frequency (unit is Hz) of the resonance point. When there is any resonance point in the system,
its information will be shown in P2-45 and P2-46 as P2-43 and P2-44.

2) If the resonance conditions are not improved when P2-47 is set to 1 for over three times,
please adjust notch filters (resonance suppression parameters) manually to or eliminate the
resonance.

5-18 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure

5.5.6 Mechanical Resonance Suppression Method

In order to suppress the high frequency resonance of the mechanical system, ASDA-B2
series servo drive provides three notch filters (resonance suppression parameters) for
resonance suppression. Two notch filters can be set to suppress the resonance
automatically. If the users do not want to suppress the resonance automatically, these
two notch filter can also be set to or eliminate the resonance manually.

Please refer to the following flowchart for manual adjustment.

Revision June 2010 5-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure

5.5.7 Relationship between Tuning Modes and Parameters

AutoSet
Tuning Mode P2-32 User-defined Parameter Gain Value
Parameter
P1-37 (Ratio of Load Inertia to Servo
Motor Inertia [J_load / J_motor])
P2-00 (Proportional Position Loop
Gain)
0(Default P2-04 (Proportional Speed Loop Gain)
Manual Mode None Fixed
setting)
P2-06 (Speed Integral Compensation)
P2-25 (Low-pass Filter Time Constant
of Resonance Suppression)
P2-26 (External Anti-Interference Gain)
P1-37
P2-00
P2-02 Continuous
Auto Mode P2-04 P2-31 (Auto Stiffness and Frequency Adjusting
[Continuous 1
P2-06 response Level) (every 30
Adjustment]
P2-25 minutes)
P2-26
P2-49
P1-37
P2-00
Non-
P2-02 continuous
Semi-Auto Mode P2-04 P2-31 (Auto Stiffness and Frequency Adjusting
[Non-continuous 2
P2-06 response Level) (stop after a
Adjustment]
P2-25 period of
time)
P2-26
P2-49

When switching mode #1 to #0, the setting value of P2-00, P2-02, P2-04, P2-06, P2-25,
P2-26 and P2-49 will change to the value that measured in #1 auto-tuning mode.
When switching mode #2 to #0, the setting value of P2-00, P2-02, P2-04, P2-06, P2-25,
P2-26 and P2-49 will change to the value that measured in #2 semi-auto tuning mode.

5-20 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure

5.5.8 Gain Adjustment in Manual Mode

The position and speed responsiveness selection is depending on and determined by the
the control stiffness of machinery and conditions of applications. Generally, high
reponsiveness is essential for the high frequency positioning control of mechanical
facilities and the applications of high precision process system. However, the higher
responsiveness may easily result in the resonance of machinery system. Therefore, for the
applications of high responsiveness, the machinery system with control stiffness is
needed to avoid the resonance. Especially when adjusting the responsiveness of
unfamiliar machinery system, the users can gradually increase the gain setting value to
improve responsiveness untill the resonance occurs, and then decrease the gain setting
value. The relevant parameters and gain adjusting methods are described as follows:

„ KPP, Parameter P2-00 Proportional Position Loop Gain

This parameter is used to determine the responsiveness of position loop (position

loop gain). It could be used to increase stiffness, expedite position loop response
and reduce position error. When the setting value of KPP is higher, the response to
the position command is quicker, the position error is less and the settling time is
also shorter. However, if the setting value is over high, the machinery system may
generate vibration or noise, or even overshoot during positioning. The position loop
responsiveness is calculated as follows:

„ KVP, Parameter P2-04 Proportional Speed Loop Gain

This parameter is used to determine the frequency response of speed loop (speed
loop gain). It could be used to expedite speed loop response. When the setting value
of KVP is higher, the response to the speed command is quicker. However, if the
setting value is over high, it may result in the resonance of machinery system. The
frequency response of speed loop must be higher than the 4~6 times of the
frequency response of position loop. If frequency response of position loop is higher
than the frequency response of speed loop, the machinery system may generate
vibration or noise, or even overshoot during positioning. The speed loop frequency
response is calculated as follows: JM: Motor Inertia
JL: Load Inertia
P1-37: 0.1 times

When the value of P1-37 (no matter it is the measured load inertia value or the set
load inertia value) is equal to the actual load inertia value, the actual speed loop
frequency response will be:
K VP
= Hz
2 .

Revision June 2010 5-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure

„ KVI, Parameter P2-06 Speed Integral Compensation

If the setting value of KVI is higher, the capability of decreasing the speed control
deviation is better. However, if the setting value is over high, it may easily result in
the vibration of machinery system. The recommended setting value is as follows:

„ NLP, Parameter P2-25 Low-pass Filter Time Constant of Resonance Suppression

When the value of (J_load / J_motor) is high, the responsiveness of speed loop may
decrease. At this time, the users can increase the setting value of KVP (P2-04) to
keep the responsiveness of speed loop. However, when increasing the setting value
of KVP (P2-04), it may easily result in the vibration of machinery system. Please use
this parameter to suppress or eliminate the noise of resonance. If the setting value
of NLP is higher, the capability of improving the noise of resonance is better.
However, if the setting value is over high, it may easily lead to the instability of
speed loop and overshoot of machinery system.
The recommended setting value is as follows:

„ DST, Parameter P2-26 External Anti-Interference Gain

This parameter is used to enhance the anti-interference capability and reduce the
occurrence of overshoot. The default setting is 0 (Disabled). It is not recommended
to use it in manual mode only when performing a few tuning on the value gotten
through P2-32 AutoMode (PDFF) (setting value is 5, mode 5) automatically (The
setting value of P2-26 will change to the value that measured in mode 5 (AutoMode
(PDFF)) when switching mode 5 ((AutoMode (PDFF)) to mode 0 (Manual mode)).

„ PFG, Parameter P2-02 Position Feed Forward Gain

This parameter is used to reduce position error and shorten the positioning settling
time. However, if the setting value is over high, it may easily lead to the overshoot of
machinery system. If the value of electronic gear ratio (1-44/1-45) is over than 10,
the machinery system may also easily generate vibration or noise.

5-22 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

6.1 Control Modes of Operation

The Delta ASDA-B2 series can be programmed to provide six single and five dual modes of
operation. Their operation and description is listed in the following table.

Mode Code Description

External Position control mode for the servo motor
External Position Control P
is achieved via an external pulse command.
(External / Internal) Speed control mode for the
servo motor can be achieved via parameters set
within the controller or from an external analog -10
Speed Control S
~ +10 VDC command. Control of the internal speed
mode is via the Digital Inputs (DI). (A maximum of
three speeds can be stored internally).
Internal Speed control mode for the servo motor is
only achieved via parameters set within the
Internal Speed Control Sz controller. Control of the internal speed mode is via
Single the Digital Inputs (DI). (A maximum of three speeds
Mode can be stored internally).
(External / Internal) Torque control mode for the
servo motor can be achieved via parameters set
within the controller or from an external analog -10
Torque Control T
~ +10 VDC command. Control of the internal torque
mode is via the Digital Inputs (DI). (A maximum of
three torque levels can be stored internally).
Tz Internal Torque control mode for the servo motor is
only achieved via parameters set within the
Internal Torque Control controller. Control of the internal torque mode is
via the Digital Inputs (DI). (A maximum of three
torque levels can be stored internally).
S-P Either S or P control mode can be selected via the
Digital Inputs (DI)
T-P Either T or P control mode can be selected via the
Dual Mode
Digital Inputs (DI)
S-T Either S or T control mode can be selected via the
Digital Inputs (DI)

The steps of changing mode:

(1) Switching the servo drive to Servo Off status. Turning SON signal of Digit input to be off
can complete this action.
(2) Using parameter P1-01. (Refer to chapter 7).
(3) After the setting is completed, cut the power off and restart the drive again.
The following sections describe the operation of each control mode, including control
structure, command source and loop gain adjustment, etc.

Revision June 2010 6-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

6.2 Position Control Mode

The position control mode is usually used for the applications requiring precision positioning,
such as industry positioning machine, indexing table etc. The external pulse train with
direction which can control the rotation angle of servo motor. The max. input frequency for
the external pulse command is 4Mpps.
For the closed-loop positioning, speed control loop is the principal part and the auxiliary
parameters are position loop gain and feed forward compensation. The users can also select
two kinds of tuning mode (Manual/Auto modes) to perform gain adjustment. This Section 6.2
mainly describes the applicability of loop gain adjustment and feed forward compensation of
Delta servo system.

6.2.1 Command Source of Position (PT) Control Mode

The command source of P mode is external pulse train input form terminals. There are
three types of pulse input and each pulse type is with·logic type (positive (+), negative (-)).
They all can be set in parameter P1-00. Please refer to the following relevant parameters:

Communication Addr.:
P1 - 00▲ PTT External Pulse Input Type
0100H, 0101H

Default: 2 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: PT Section 6.2.1
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 1132
Data Size: 16bit
Display Format: HEX
Settings:
• Value A: Pulse type
A=0: AB phase pulse (4x)
A=1: CW + CCW pulse
A
A=2: Pulse + Direction
B
C Other settings:
not used
B: Input pulse filter
This setting is used to suppress or reduce the chatter caused by the noise, etc.
However, if the instant input pulse filter frequency is over high, the frequency that
exceeds the setting value will be regarded as noise and filtered.
B Low Filter Setting Value High Filter
0 1.66Mpps 0 6.66Mpps
1 416Kpps 1 1.66Mpps
2 208Kpps 2 833Kpps
3 104Kpps 3 416Kpps

6-2 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

• Value C: Logic type

Logic Pulse Type Forward Reverse

AB phase
pulse

Positive CW + CCW
0
Logic pulse

Pulse +
Direction

AB phase
pulse

Negativ CW + CCW
1
e Logic pulse

Pulse +
Direction

Max. input Min. time width

Pulse specification pulse
frequency T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6

Line
High-speed pulse 4Mpps 62.5ns 125ns 250ns 200ns 125ns 125ns
receiver
Line driver 500Kpps 0.5μs 1μs 2μs 2μs 1μs 1μs
Low-speed pulse Open
200Kpps 1.25μs 2.5μs 5μs 5μs 2.5μs 2.5μs
collector

Max. input pulse Voltage

Pulse specification Forward specification
frequency specification
High-speed Line
4Mpps 5V < 25mA
pulse receiver
Line
500Kpps 2.8V ~ 3.7V < 25mA
Low-speed driver
pulse Open
200Kpps 24V (Max.) < 25mA
collector

• Source of pulse command

Setting
Input pulse interface Remark
value
Open collector for CN1 Terminal Identification:
0
low-speed pulse PULSE, SIGN
Line driver for CN1 Terminal Identification:
1
high-speed pulse PULSE_D, SIGN_D
Revision June 2010 6-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

The source of pulse command can also be determined by digital input, PTCMS. When the
digital input function is used, the source of pulse command is from digital input.
Position pulse can be input from these terminals, PULSE (41), /PULSE (43), HPULSE (38),
/HPULSE (36), SIGN (37), /SIGN (39) and HSIGN (42), /HSIGN (40). It can be an open-collector
circuit or line driver circuit. For the detail wiring, please refer to 3.6.1.

6.2.2 Structure of Position Control Mode

Basic Structure:

In order to pursue the goal of perfection in position control, the pulse signal should be
modified through position command processing and the structure is shown as the figure
below:

Using parameter P1-01 can select P mode. Electronic gear ratio can be set in P modes to
set proper position revolution. ASDA-B2 series servo drive also provides low-pass filter,
which are used whenever the motor and load need to be operated more smoothly. As for
the information of electronic gear ratio, and low-pass filter, please refer to the following
sections 6.2.3 and 6.2.4.

6-4 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

Pulse Inhibit Input Function (INHP)

INHP is activated via digital inputs (Please refer to parameter P2-10 ~ P2-17，P2-36 and DI
INHP(07) in Table 7.1).When the drive is in position mode, if INHP is activated, the
external pulse input command is not valid and the motor will stop.

6.2.3 Electronic Gear Ratio

Relevant parameters:
Communication Addr.:
P1 - 44▲ GR1 Electronic Gear Ratio (1st Numerator) (N1)
0158H, 0159H

Default: 16 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: PT Section 6.2.5
Unit: Pulse
Range: 1 ~（226-1）
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
Multiple-step electronic gear numerator setting. Please refer to P2-60~P2-62.
Please note:
1. In PT mode, the setting value of P1-44 can’t be changed when the servo drive is
enabled (Servo On).

Communication Addr.:
P1 - 45▲ GR2 Electronic Gear Ratio (Denominator)
015AH, 015BH

Default: 10 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: PT Section 6.3.6
Unit: Pulse
Range: 1 ~（231-1）
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
As the wrong setting can cause motor to run chaotically (out of control) and it may
lead to personnel injury, therefore, ensure to observe the following rule when
setting P1-44, P1-45.
The electronic gear ratio setting:

Position f1: Pulse input f2: Position command

Pulse input N command
M N: Numerator 1, 2, 3, 4, the setting value of P1-44
f1 N
f2 = f1 x M or P2-60 ~ P2-63
M: Denominator, the setting value of P1-45
Revision June 2010 6-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

The electronic gear ratio setting range must be within: 1/50<N/M<25600.

Please note:
In PT mode, the setting value of P1-45 can’t be changed when the servo drive is
enabled (Servo On).
The electronic gear function provides easy travel distance ratio change. However, the over
high electronic gear ratio will command the motor to move not smoothly. At this time, the
users can use low-pass filter parameter to improve this kind of situation. For example,
assume that the electronic gear ratio is equal to 1 and the encoder pulse per revolution is
10000ppr, if the electronic gear ratio is changed to 0.5, then the motor will rotate one
pulse when the command from external controller is two pulses.
For example, after the proper electronic gear ratio is set, the reference travel distance is 1
μm/pulse, the machinery will become easier to be used.

Electronic Gear Ratio Corresponding travel distance per

pulse
When the electronic
1 3x 100 0 300 0
gear ratio is not =
1
= =
4x 250 0 100 00
m
used
When the electronic 1000 0
=1 m
=
gear ratio is used 300 0

6-6 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

6.2.4 Low-pass Filter

Relevant parameters:
Smooth Constant of Position Command Communication Addr.:
P1 - 08 PFLT
(Low-pass Filter) 0110H, 0111H

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: PT Section 6.2.6
Unit: 10ms
Range: 0 ~ 1000 (0: Disabled)
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Position

Tar get pos ition

Time (ms)
PF LT

6.2.5 Position Loop Gain Adjustment

Before performing position control (setting position control block diagram), the users
should complete the speed control setting by using Manual mode (parameter P-32) since
the position loop contains speed loop. Then, adjust the Proportional Position Loop Gain,
KPP (parameter P2-00) and Position Feed Forward Gain, PFG (parameter P2-02). Or use
Auto mode to adjust the gain of speed and position control block diagram automatically.
1) Proportional Position Loop Gain: To increase this gain can enhance the position loop
responsiveness.
2) Position Feed Forward Gain: To increase this gain can reduce the position track error
during operation.
The position loop responsiveness cannot exceed the speed loop responsiveness, and it is
recommended that the speed loop responsiveness should be at least four times faster
than the position loop responsiveness. This also means that the setting value of
Proportional Speed Loop Gain, KVP should be at least four times faster than Proportional
Position Loop Gain, KPP.
The equation is shown as follows:

fp < fv
4 , fv : Speed Loop Responsiveness (Hz), fp : Position Loop Responsiveness (Hz)

KPP = 2 × π × fp.

Revision June 2010 6-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

For example, the desired position loop responsiveness is equal to 20 Hz.

Then, KPP = 2 × π × 20= 125 rad/s.

Relevant parameters:
Communication Addr.:
P2 - 00 KPP Proportional Position Loop Gain
0200H, 0201H

Default: 35 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: PT Section 6.2.8
Unit: rad/s
Range: 0 ~ 2047
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the position loop gain. It can increase stiffness,
expedite position loop response and reduce position error. However, if the setting
value is over high, it may generate vibration or noise.

Communication Addr.:
P2 - 02 PFG Position Feed Forward Gain
0204H, 0205H

Default: 50 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: PT Section 6.2.8
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
This parameter is used to set the feed forward gain when executing position
control command. When using position smooth command, increase gain can
improve position track deviation. When not using position smooth command,
decrease gain can improve the resonance condition of mechanical system. However,
if the setting value is over high, it may generate vibration or noise.

6-8 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

When the value of Proportional Position Loop Gain, KPP is too great, the position loop
responsiveness will be increased and it will result in small phase margin. If this happens,
the rotor of motor will oscillate. At this time, the users have to decrease the value of KPP
until the rotor of motor stop oscillating. When there is an external torque command
interrupted, over low KPP value will let the motor cannot overcome the external strength
and fail to meet the requirement of reasonable position track error demand. Adjust feed
forward gain, PFG (P2-02) to efficiently reduce the dynamic position track error.

Revision June 2010 6-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

6.3 Speed Control Mode

The speed control mode (S or Sz) is usually used on the applications of precision speed
control, such as CNC machine, etc. ASDA-B2 series servo drive supports two kinds of
command sources in speed control mode. One is external analog signal and the other is
internal parameter. The external analog signal is from external voltage input and it can
control the speed of servo motor. There are two usage of internal parameter, one is set
different speed command in three speed control parameters before operation and then using
SPD0 and SPD1 of CN1 DI signal perform switching. The other usage is using serial
communication to change the setting value of parameter.
Beside, in order to make the speed command switch more smoothly, ASDA-B2 series servo
drive also provides complete S-curve profile for speed control mode. For the closed-loop
speed control, ASDA-B2 series servo drive provides gain adjustment function and an
integrated PI or PDFF controller. Besides, two modes of tuning technology (Manual/Auto) are
also provided for the users to select (parameter P2-32).
There are two turning modes for gain adjustment: Manual and Auto modes.

„ Manual Mode: User-defined loop gain adjustment. When using this mode, all auto and
auxiliary function will be disabled.

„ Auto Mode: Continuous adjustment of loop gains according to measured inertia, with ten
levels of system bandwidth. The parameter set by user is default value.

6.3.1 Command Source of Speed Control Mode

Speed command Sources:
1) External analog signal: External analog voltage input, -10V to +10V

2) Internal parameter: P1-09 to P1-11

Speed CN1 DI
Comman signal Command Source Content Range
d SPD1 SPD0
External
Voltage between
S analog +/-10 V
Mod V-REF-GND
S1 0 0 signal
e
Speed command is
Sz N/A 0
0
-50000 ~
S2 0 1 P1-09
50000
-50000 ~
S3 1 0 Internal parameter P1-10
50000
-50000 ~
S4 1 1 P1-11
50000

6-10 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

„ State of SPD0~1: 0: indicates OFF (Normally Open); 1: indicates ON (Normally

Closed)
„ When SPD0 and SPD1 are both = 0 (OFF), if the control mode of operation is Sz,
then the speed command is 0. Therefore, if the users do not use analog voltage as
speed command, the users can choose Sz mode and avoid the zero point drift
problem of analog voltage signal. If the speed control mode is S mode, then the
command is the analog voltage between V-REF and GND. The setting range of the
input voltage is from -10V to +10V and the corresponding motor speed is
adjustable (Please see parameter P1-40).
„ When at least one of SPD0 and SPD1 is not 0 (OFF), the speed command is internal
parameter (P1-09 to P1-11). The command is valid (enabled) after either SPD0 or
SPD1 is changed.
„ The range of internal parameters is within -50000 ~ +50000 r/min. Setting value =
Range x Unit (0.1 r/min). For example, if P1-09 is set to +30000, the setting value
= +30000 x 0.1 r/min = +3000 r/min.

The speed command that is described in this section not only can be taken as speed
command in speed control mode (S or Sz mode) but also can be the speed limit input
command in torque control mode (T or Tz mode).

6.3.2 Structure of Speed Control Mode

Basic Structure:

In the figure above, the speed command processing is used to select the command
source of speed control according to chapter 6.3.1, including proportional gain (P1-40)
and S-curve filter smoothing strategy of speed control. The speed control block diagram
is used to manage the gain parameters of the servo drive and calculate the current input
provided to motor instantaneously. The resonance suppression block diagram is used to
suppress the resonance of mechanical system.

The function and structure of speed command processing is shown as the figure below:

Revision June 2010 6-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

SPD0,SPD1 signal of CN1

Internal S-curve filter

parameter
(Command source: P1-34,
Internal parameter) P1-09 P1-35,
~P1-11 P1-36

Analog command
Proportion filter Command Low-pass
(Command source:
A/D Gain P1-34, selection filter
External analog signal)
P1-40 P1-35, P1-01 P1-06
P1-36

Analog signal

The command source is selected according to the state of SPD0, SPD1 and parameter P1-
01 (S or Sz). Whenever the command signal needs to be more smoothly, we recommend
the users to use S-curve and low-pass filter.

6.3.3 Smoothing Strategy of Speed Control Mode

S-curve Filter
The S-curve filter is a speed smoothing command which provides 3 steps accel / decel S-
curve to smooth the speed command change of the motor during acceleration and
deceleration. Using S-curve filter can let the servo motor run more smoothly in response
to a sudden speed command change. Since the speed and acceleration curve are both
continuous, in order to avoid the mechanical resonance and noise may occur due to a
sudden speed command (differentiation of acceleration), using S-curve filter not only can
improve the performance when servo motor accelerate or decelerate but also can make
the motor run more smoothly. S-curve filter parameters include P1-34 Acceleration Time
(TACC), P1-35 Deceleration Time (TDEC) and Accel /Decel S-curve (TSL), and the users can
use these three parameters to improve the motor performance during acceleration,
deceleration and operation. ASDA-B2 series servo drives also support the time calculation
of completing speed command. T (ms) is the operation (running) time. S (r/min) is
absolute speed command, i.e. the absolute value (the result) after starting speed
subtracts the final speed.

6-12 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

Relevant parameters:
Communication Addr.:
P1 - 34 TACC Acceleration Time
00144H, 0145H

Default: 200 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: S Section 6.3.3
Unit: ms
Range: 1 ~ 20000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
This parameter is used to determine the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 to
its rated motor speed. The functions of parameters P1-34, P1-35 and P1-36 are
each individual. When P1-36 is set to 0 (Disabled), the settings of P1-34, P1-35 are
still effective. It indicates that the parameters P1-34 and P1-35 will not become
disabled even when P1-36 is disabled.

NOTE

1. When the source of speed command is analog command, the maximum setting
value of P1-36 is set to 0, the acceleration and deceleration function will be disabled.
2. When the source of speed command is analog command, the maximum setting
value of P1-34 is limited to 20000 automatically.

Revision June 2010 6-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

Communication Addr.:
P1 - 35 TDEC Deceleration Time
0146H, 0147H

Default: 200 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: P/S P1-34, P1-36, Section 6.3.3
Unit: ms
Range: 1 ~ 20000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
This parameter is used to determine the deceleration time to decelerate from its
rated rotation speed to 0. The functions of parameters P1-34, P1-35 and P1-36 are
each individual. When P1-36 is set to 0 (Disabled), the settings of P1-34, P1-35 are
still effective. It indicates that the parameters P1-34 and P1-35 will not become
disabled even when P1-36 is disabled.

NOTE

1. When the source of speed command is analog command, the maximum setting
value of P1-36 is set to 0, the acceleration and deceleration function will be disabled.
2. When the source of speed command is analog command, the maximum setting
value of P1-34 is limited to 20000 automatically.

Communication Addr.:
P1 - 36 TSL Accel /Decel S-curve
0148H, 0149H

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control mode: S Section 6.3.3
Unit: ms
Range: 0 ~ 10000 (0: Disabled)
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
This parameter is used to make the motor run more smoothly when startup and
windup. Using this parameter can improve the motor running stability.

TSL: P1-36, Accel /Decel S-curve

TACC: P1-34, Acceleration time
TDEC: P1-35, Deceleration time

6-14 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

Total acceleration time = TACC + TSL

Total deceleration time = TDEC + TSL
The functions of parameters P1-34, P1-35 and P1-36 are each individual. When P1-
36 is set to 0 (Disabled), the settings of P1-34, P1-35 are still effective. It indicates
that the parameters P1-34 and P1-35 will not become disabled even when P1-36 is
disabled.

NOTE

1. When the source of speed command is analog command, the maximum setting
value of P1-36 is set to 0, the acceleration and deceleration function will be disabled.
2. When the source of speed command is analog command, the maximum setting
value of P1-36 is limited to 10000 automatically.

Analog Speed Command S-curve Filter

ASDA-B2 series servo drives also provide Analog Speed Command S-curve Filter for the
smoothing in response to a sudden analog input signal.
Speed (rpm) Analog speed command Motor Torque
3000

0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Time (sec)

-3000

The analog speed command S-curve filter is for the smoothing of analog input signal and
its function is the same as the S-curve filter. The speed and acceleration curve of analog
speed command S-curve filter are both continuous. The above figure shows the curve of
analog speed command S-curve filter and the users can see the ramp of speed command
is different during acceleration and deceleration. Also, the users can see the difference of
input command tracking and can adjust time setting by using parameter P1-34, P1-35, P1-
36 to improve the actual motor performance according to actual condition.

Analog Speed Command Low-pass Filter

Analog Speed Command Low-pass Filter is used to eliminate high frequency response and
electrical interference from an analog speed command and it is also with smoothing
function.

Revision June 2010 6-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

Relevant parameters:
Accel / Decel Smooth Constant of
Communication Addr.:
P1 - 06 SFLT Analog Speed Command (Low-pass
010CH, 010DH
Filter)

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: S Section 6.3.3
Unit: ms
Range: 0 ~ 1000 (0: Disabled)
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC

NOTE

1) If the setting value of parameter P1-06 is set to 0, it indicates the function of this
parameter is disabled and the command is just By-Pass.

Target Speed

SFLT

6.3.4 Analog Speed Input Scaling

The analog voltage between V_REF and GND determines the motor speed command.
Using with parameter P1-40 (Max. Analog Speed Command) can adjust the speed control
ramp and its range.

5000rpm
The speed control ramp is
determined by parameter P1-40
3000rpm

-10 -5

5 10 Analog Input Voltage (V)

-3000rpm

-5000rpm

6-16 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

Relevant parameters:
Communication Addr.:
P1 - 40▲ VCM Max. Analog Speed Command / Limit
0150H, 0151H

Default: rated speed Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: S/T Section 6.3.4
Unit: r/min
Range: 0 ~ 10000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
In Speed mode, this parameter is used to set the speed at the maximum input
voltage (10V) of the analog speed command.
In Torque mode, this parameter is used to set the speed at the maximum input
voltage (10V) of the analog speed limit.
For example, in speed mode, if P1-40 is set to 3000 and the input voltage is 10V, it
indicates that the speed command is 3000r/min. If P1-40 is set to 3000, but the
input voltage is changed to 5V, then the speed command is changed to 1500r/min.
Speed command / limit = Input voltage x setting/10

6.3.5 Timing Chart of Speed Control Mode

S4 (P1-11)
Internal speed
S3 (P1-10)
command
S2 (P1-09)

External analog
voltage or zero (0) S1

SPD0 OFF ON OFF ON

External I/O signal SPD1 OFF ON

SON ON

NOTE

1) OFF indicates normally open and ON indicates normally closed.

2) When speed control mode is Sz, the speed command S1=0; when speed control mode is S,
the speed command S1 is external analog voltage input (Please refer to P1-01).

3) After Servo ON, the users can select command according to the state of SPD0~1.

Revision June 2010 6-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

6.3.6 Speed Loop Gain Adjustment

The function and structure of speed control mode is shown as the figure below:

There are two turning modes of gain adjustment: Manual and Auto modes. The gain of
ASDA-B2 series servo drives can be adjusted by using any one of three tuning modes.
„ Manual Mode: User-defined loop gain adjustment. When using this mode, all auto
and auxiliary function will be disabled.
„ Auto Mode: Continuous adjustment of loop gains according to measured inertia,
with ten levels of system bandwidth. The parameter set by user is default value.

The mode of gain adjustment can be selected by parameter P2-32:

Communication Addr.:
P2 - 32▲ AUT2 Tuning Mode Selection
0240H, 0241H

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 5.6, Section 6.3.6
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 2
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: HEX
Settings:
0: Manual mode
1: AutoMode (PI) [Continuous adjustment]
2: Semi-Auto Mode [Non-continuous adjustment]

6-18 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

Explanation of manual mode:

1. When P2-32 is set to mode#0, the setting value of P2-00, P2-02, P2-04, P2-06,
P2-07, P2-25 and P2-26 can be user-defined. When switching mode #1 or #2 to
#0, the setting value of P2-00, P2-02, P2-04, P2-06, P2-07, P2-25 and P2-26 will
change to the value that measured in #1 auto-tuning mode or #2 semi-auto
tuning mode.

Explanation of auto-tuning mode:

The servo drive will continuously estimate the system inertia, save the measured
load inertia value automatically and memorized in P1-37 every 30 minutes by
referring to the frequency response settings of P2-31.
1. When switching mode #1 or #2 to #0, the servo drive will continuously estimate
the system inertia, save the measured load inertia value automatically and
memorized in P1-37. Then, set the corresponding parameters according to this
measured load inertia value.
2. When switching mode#0 or #1 to #2, enter the appropriate load inertia value in
P1-37.
3. When switching mode#1 to #0, the setting value of P2-00, P2-04 and P2-06 will
change to the value that measured in #1 auto-tuning mode.

Explanation of semi-auto tuning mode:

1. After the system inertia becomes stable (The display of P2-33 will show 1), it
will stop estimating the system inertia, save the measured load inertia value
automatically, and memorized in P1-37. However, when P2-32 is set to mode#1
or #2, the servo drive will continuously perform the adjustment for a period of
time.
2. When the value of the system inertia becomes over high, the display of P2-33
will show 0 and the servo drive will start to adjust the load inertia value
continuously.

Manual Mode
When Tuning Mode Settings of P2-32 is set to 0, the users can define the proportional
speed loop gain (P2-04), speed integral gain (P2-06) feed forward gain (P2-07) and ratio of
load inertia to servo motor Inertia (1-37). Please refer to the following description:
„ Proportional gain: Adjust this gain can increase the position loop responsiveness.
„ Integral gain: Adjust this gain can enhance the low-frequency stiffness of speed
loop and eliminate the steady error. Also, reduce the value of phase margin. Over
high integral gain will result in the unstable servo system.
„ Feed forward gain: Adjust this gain can decrease the phase delay error

Revision June 2010 6-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

Relevant parameters:
Communication Addr.:
P2 - 04 KVP Proportional Speed Loop Gain
0208H, 0209H

Default: 500 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.3.6
Unit: rad/s
Range: 0 ~ 8191
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the speed loop gain. When the value of proportional
speed loop gain is increased, it can expedite speed loop response. However, if the
setting value is over high, it may generate vibration or noise.

Communication Addr.:
P2 - 06 KVI Speed Integral Compensation
020CH, 020DH

Default: 100 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.3.6
Unit: rad/s
Range: 0 ~ 1023
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the integral time of speed loop. When the value of
speed integral compensation is increased, it can improve the speed response ability
and decrease the speed control deviation. However, if the setting value is over high,
it may generate vibration or noise.

Communication Addr.:
P2 - 07 KVF Speed Feed Forward Gain
020EH, 020FH

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.3.6
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the feed forward gain when executing speed control
command.

6-20 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

When using speed smooth command, increase gain can improve speed track
deviation.
When not using speed smooth command, decrease gain can improve the resonance
condition of mechanical system.

In theory, stepping response can be used to explain proportional gain (KVP), integral gain
(KVI) and feed forward gain (KVF). Now we use frequency area and time area respectively
to explain the logic.

Frequency Domain

Revision June 2010 6-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

Time Domain

6-22 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

In general, the equipment, such as spectrum analyzer is needed and used to analyze
when using frequency domain method and the users also should have this kind of
analysis technology. However, when using time domain method, the users only need to
prepare an oscilloscope. Therefore, the general users usually use time domain method
with the analog DI/DO terminal provided by the servo drive to adjust what is called as PI
(Proportional and Integral) type controller. As for the performance of torque shaft load,
input command tracking and torque shaft load have the same responsiveness when using
frequency domain method and time domain method. The users can reduce the
responsiveness of input command tracking by using input command low-pass filter.

Auto Mode (Continuous adjustment))

This Auto Mode provides continuous adjustment of loop gains according to measured
inertia automatically. It is suitable when the load inertia is fixed or the load inertia change
is small and is not suitable for wide range of load inertia change. The period of
adjustment time is different depending on the acceleration and deceleration of servo
motor. To change the stiffness and responsiveness, please use parameter P2-31.

Motor Speed

Inertia Measurement

Revision June 2010 6-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

6.3.7 Resonance Suppression

The resonance of mechanical system may occur due to excessive system stiffness or
frequency response. However, this kind of resonance condition can be improved,
suppressed, even can be eliminated by using low-pass filter (parameter P2-25) and notch
filter (parameter P2-23, P2-24) without changing control parameter.

Relevant parameters:
Communication Addr.:
P2 - 23 NCF1 Notch Filter 1 (Resonance Suppression)
022EH, 022FH

Default: 1000 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.3.7
Unit: Hz
Range: 50 ~ 2000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
This parameter is used to set first resonance frequency of mechanical system. It
can be used to suppress the resonance of mechanical system and reduce the
vibration of mechanical system.
If P2-24 is set to 0, this parameter is disabled.
The parameters P2-23 and P2-24 are the first group of notch filter parameters and
the parameters P2-43 and P2-44 are the second group of notch filter parameters.

Notch Filter Attenuation Rate 1 Communication Addr.:

P2 - 24 DPH1
(Resonance Suppression) 0230H, 0231H

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.3.7
Unit: dB
Range: 0 ~ 32
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings: 0: Disabled
This parameter is used to set magnitude of the resonance suppression that is set
by parameter P2-23. If P2-24 is set to 0, the parameters P2-23 and P2-24 are both
disabled.
The parameters P2-23 and P2-24 are the first group of notch filter parameters and
the parameters P2-43 and P2-44 are the second group of notch filter parameters.

6-24 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

Communication Addr.:
P2 - 43 NCF2 Notch Filter 2 (Resonance Suppression)
0256H, 0257H

Default: 1000 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.3.7
Unit: Hz
Range: 50 ~ 2000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings: 0: Disabled
This parameter is used to set second resonance frequency of mechanical system. It
can be used to suppress the resonance of mechanical system and reduce the
vibration of mechanical system. If P2-43 is set to 0, this parameter is disabled.
The parameters P2-23 and P2-24 are the first group of notch filter parameters and
the parameters P2-43 and P2-44 are the second group of notch filter parameters.

Notch Filter Attenuation Rate 2 Communication Addr.:

P2 - 44 DPH2
(Resonance Suppression) 0258H, 0259H

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.3.7
Unit: dB
Range: 0 ~ 32
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings: 0: Disabled
This parameter is used to set magnitude of the resonance suppression that is set
by parameter P2-43. If P2-44 is set to 0, the parameters P2-43 and P2-44 are both
disabled.

Communication Addr.:
P2 - 45 NCF3 Notch Filter 3 (Resonance Suppression)
025AH, 025BH

Default: 1000 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.3.7
Unit: Hz
Range: 50 ~ 2000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
This parameter is used to set third resonance frequency of mechanical system. It
can be used to suppress the resonance of mechanical system and reduce the

Revision June 2010 6-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

vibration of mechanical system. If P2-45 is set to 0, this parameter is disabled.

Notch Filter Attenuation Rate 3 Communication Addr.:

P2 - 46 DPH3
(Resonance Suppression) 025CH, 025DH

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.3.7
Unit: dB
Range: 0 ~ 32
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
This parameter is used to set magnitude of the resonance suppression that is set
by parameter P2-45. If P2-46 is set to 0, the parameters P2-45 and P2-46 are both
disabled.

Low-pass Filter Time Constant Communication Addr.:

P2 - 25 NLP
(Resonance Suppression) 0232H, 0233H

Default: 2 (1kW and below models) or Related Section:

5 (above 1kW models) Section 6.3.7
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: 0.1ms
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
This parameter is used to set low-pass filter time constant of resonance
suppression. If P2-25 is set to 0, this parameter is disabled.

6-26 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

There are two groups of notch filters provided by ASDA-A2 series. The first group of notch
filter is P2-43 and P2-44, and the second group of notch filter is P2-45 and P2-46. When there
is resonance, please set P2-47 to 1 or 2 (Auto mode), and then the servo drive will find
resonance frequency and suppress the resonance automatically. After suppressing the
resonance point, the system will memorize the notch filter frequency into P2-43 and P-45, and
memorize the notch filter attenuation rate into P2-44 and P2-46.
When P2-47 is set to 1, the resonance suppression will be enabled automatically. After the
mechanical system becomes stable (approximate 20 minutes), the setting value of P2-47 will
return to 0 (Disable auto resonance suppression function). When P2-47 is set to 2, the system
will find the resonance point continuously even after the mechanical system becomes stable.
When P2-47 is set to 1 or 2, if the resonance conditions can not be eliminated, we recommend
the users to check the settings of P2-44 and P2-46. If either of the setting value of P2-44 and
P2-46 is set to 32, please decrease the speed frequency response and estimate the resonance
point again. If the resonance conditions can not be eliminated when the setting values of P2-
44 and P2-46 are both less than 32, please set P2-47 to 0 first, and increase the setting value
of P2-44 and P2-46 manually. If the resonance exists still after increasing the setting value of
P2-44 and P2-46, please decrease the value of speed frequency response again and then use
the resonance suppression function again.
When increasing the setting value of P2-44 and P2-46 manually, ensure to pay close attention
on the setting value of P2-44 and P2-46. If the value of P2-44 and P2-46 is greater than 0, it
indicates that the corresponding resonance frequency of P2-43 and P2-45 is found through
auto resonance suppression function. If the value of P2-44 and P2-46 is equal to 0, it indicates
that the value of P2-43 and P2-45 will be the default value 1000 and this is not the frequency
found by auto resonance suppression function. At this time, if the users increase the value of
notch filter attenuation rate which does not exist, the performance of the current mechanical
system may deteriorate.

Settings of P2-47
Current Value Desired Value Function
Clear the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46 and enable
0 1
auto resonance suppression function.
Clear the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46 and enable
0 2
auto resonance suppression function.
Save the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46 and disable
1 0
auto resonance suppression function.
Clear the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46 and enable
1 1
auto resonance suppression function.
Do not clear the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46 and
1 2 enable auto resonance suppression function
continuously.
Save the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46 and disable
2 0
auto resonance suppression function.
Clear the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46 and enable
2 1
auto resonance suppression function.

Revision June 2010 6-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

Settings of P2-47
Current Value Desired Value Function
Do not clear the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46 and
2 2 enable auto resonance suppression function
continuously.

Flowchart of auto resonance suppression operation:

6-28 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

Low-pass filter
Please use parameter P2-25. The figure below shows the resonant open-loop gain.

Gain

Frequency

When the low-pass filter (parameter P2-25) is adjusted from 0 to high value, the value of
Low-pass frequency (BW) will become smaller (see the figure below). The resonant
condition is improved and the frequency response and phase margin will also decrease.

Gain

0dB Frequency
BW

Notch Filter
Usually, if the users know the resonance frequency, we recommend the users can
eliminate the resonance conditions directly by using notch filter (parameter P2-23, P2-24).
However, the range of frequency setting is from 50 to 1000Hz only and the range of
resonant attenuation is 0~32 dB only. Therefore, if the resonant frequency is out of this
range, we recommend the users to use low-pass filter (parameter P2-25) to improve
resonant condition.
Please refer to the following figures and explanation to know how to use notch filter and
low-pass filter to improve resonant condition.

Revision June 2010 6-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

Use Notch Filter to suppress resonance

Resonance
Resonance
Gain conditions
Point Gain Gain
Notch Filter is suppressed

0db
Low-pass Low-pass
Frequency Attenuation Frequency
Rate P2-24

Resonance Frequency Frequency Resonance Frequency

Resonance
Frequency . Frequency Frequency .
P2-23

Use Low-pass Filter to suppress resonance

.
Resonance
Resonance conditions
Gain Gain Low-pass Filter Gain
Point is suppressed
Attenuation
Rate -3db Cut-off Frequency
0db
Low-pass of Low-pass Filter Low-pass
Frequency -
= 10000 / P2-25 Hz Frequency

Resonance Frequency Frequency Frequency

Resonance
Frequency Frequency .

When the low-pass filter (parameter P2-25) is adjusted from 0 to high value, the value of
Low-pass frequency will become smaller (see the figure on page 6-26). The resonant
condition is improved but the frequency response and phase margin will also decrease
and the system may become unstable. Therefore, if the users know the resonance
frequency, the users can eliminate the resonance conditions directly by using notch filter
(parameter P2-23, P2-24). Usually, if the resonant frequency can be recognized, we
recommend the users can directly use notch filter (parameter P2-23, P2-24) to eliminate
the resonance. However, if the resonant frequency will drift or drift out of the notch filter
range, we recommend the users not to use notch filter and use low-pass filter to improve
resonant conditions.

6-30 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

6.4 Torque Control Mode

The torque control mode (T or Tz) is usually used on the applications of torque control, such
as printing machine, spinning machine, twister, etc. Delta ASDA-B2 series servo drive
supports two kinds of command sources in torque control mode. One is external analog
signal and the other is internal parameter. The external analog signal is from external voltage
input and it can control the torque of servo motor. The internal parameters are from P1-12 to
P1-14 which are used to be the torque command in torque control mode.

6.4.1 Command Source of Torque Control Mode

Torque command Sources:
1) External analog signal: External analog voltage input, -10V to +10V
2) Internal parameter: P1-12 to P1-14
The command source selection is determined by the DI signal of CN1 connector.
DI signal of
Torque CN1 Command Source Content Range
Command
TCM1 TCM0
External analog Voltage between
T +/- 10 V
signal T-REF-GND
T1 0 0 Mode
Torque command is
Tz None 0
0
T2 0 1 P1-12 +/- 300 %
T3 1 0 Internal parameter P1-13 +/- 300 %
T4 1 1 P1-14 +/- 300 %

„ State of TCM0~1: 0: indicates OFF (Normally Open); 1: indicates ON (Normally

Closed)
„ When TCM0 and TCM1 are both 0 (OFF), if the control mode of operation is Tz,
then the command is 0. Therefore, if the users do not use analog voltage as torque
command, the users can choose Tz mode to operation torque control to avoid the
zero point drift problem of analog voltage. If the control mode of operation is T,
then the command is the analog voltage between T-REF and GND. The setting
range of the input voltage is from -10V to +10V and the corresponding torque is
adjustable (see parameter P1-41).
„ When at least one of TCM0 and TCM1 is not 0 (OFF), the torque command is
internal parameter. The command is valid (enabled) after either TCM0 or TCM1 is
changed.

The torque command that is described in this section not only can be taken as torque
command in torque control mode (T or Tz mode) but also can be the torque limit input
command in position mode (P mode) and speed control mode (S or Sz mode).

Revision June 2010 6-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

6.4.2 Structure of Torque Control Mode

Basic Structure:

The toque command processing is used to select the command source of torque control
according to chapter 6.4.1, including max. analog torque command (parameter P1-41)
and smoothing strategy of torque control mode. The current control block diagram is
used to manage the gain parameters of the servo drive and calculate the current input
provided to motor instantaneously. As the current control block diagram is too
complicated, setting the parameters of current control block diagram is not allowed. The
function and structure of torque command processing is shown as the figure below:

TCM0,TCM1 signal of CN1

(Command source: Internal

Internal parameter) parameter
P1-12
~1-14

Proportion Command Low-pass

(Command source: A/D Gain selection filter
External analog signal) P1-41 P1-01 P1-07

Analog signal

The command source is selected according to the state of TCM0, TCM1 and parameter
P1-01 (T or Tz). Whenever the command signal needs to be more smoothly, we
recommend the users to use proportional gain (scalar) and low-pass filter to adjust torque.

6-32 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

6.4.3 Smoothing Strategy of Torque Control Mode

Relevant parameters:
Smooth Constant of Analog Torque Communication Addr.:
P1 - 07 TFLT
Command (Low-pass Filter) 010EH, 010FH

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: T Section 6.4.3
Unit: ms
Range: 0 ~ 1000 (0: Disabled)
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC

NOTE

1) If the setting value of parameter P1-07 is set to 0, it indicates the function of this
parameter is disabled and the command is just By-Pass.
Target Speed

TFLT

6.4.4 Analog Torque Input Scaling

The analog voltage between T_REF and GND controls the motor torque command. Using
with parameter P1-41 can adjust the torque control ramp and its range.

300%
The torque control ramp is
determined by parameter P1-41
100%

-10 -5
Torque command
5 10 Analog Input Voltage (V)

-100%

-300%

Revision June 2010 6-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

Relevant parameters:
Communication Addr.:
P1 - 41▲ TCM Max. Analog Torque Command / Limit
0152H, 0153H

Default: 100 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.4.4
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
In Torque mode, this parameter is used to set the output torque at maximum
input voltage (10V) of analog torque command.
In Position and Speed mode, this parameter is used to set output torque at
maximum input voltage (10V) of analog torque limit
For example, in torque mode, if P1-41 is set to 100 and the input voltage is 10V, it
indicates that the torque command is 100% rated torque. If P1-41 is set to 100, but
the input voltage is changed to 5V, then the torque command is changed to 50%
rated torque.
Torque command / limit = Input voltage x setting/10 (%)

6.4.5 Timing Chart of Torque Control Mode

T4 (P1-14)
Internal speed T3 (P1-13)
command
T2 (P1-12)

External analog
voltage or zero (0) T1

TCM0 OFF ON OFF ON

TCM1 OFF ON
External I/O signal

SON ON

NOTE

1) OFF indicates normally open and ON indicates normally closed.

2) When torque control mode is Tz, the torque command T1=0; when torque control mode is
T, the speed command T1 is external analog voltage input (Please refer to P1-01).

3) After Servo ON, the users can select command according to the state of TCM0~1.

6-34 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

6.5 Control Modes Selection

Except signal control mode operation, ASDA-B2 series AC drive also provide PT-S, S-T, PT-T,
these three multiple modes for the users to select.
1） Speed / Position mode selection: PT-S
2） Speed / Torque mode selection: S-T
3） Torque / Position mode selection: PT-T

Mode Name Code Description

Either PT or S control mode can be selected via the Digital
PT-S 06
Inputs (DI)
Either PT or T control mode can be selected via the Digital
Dual Mode PT-T 07
Inputs (DI)
Either S or T control mode can be selected via the Digital
S-T 0A
Inputs (DI)

Sz and Tz mode selection is not provided. In order to avoid using too much DI inputs, we
recommend that the users can use external analog signal as input command in speed and
torque mode to reduce the use of DI inputs (SPD0~1 or TCM0~1).
Please refer to table 3.B and table 3.C in section 3.3.2 to see the default pin number of DI/DO
signal.

6.5.1 Speed / Position Control Mode Selection

PT-S Mode:
The command source of PT-S mode is from external input pulse. The speed command can
be the external analog voltage or internal parameters (P1-09 to P1-11). The speed and
position mode switching is controlled by the S-P signal. The timing chart of speed /
position control mode selection is shown as the figure below:

Revision June 2010 6-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

6.5.2 Speed / Torque Control Mode Selection

S-T Mode:
The speed command can be the external analog voltage or internal parameters (P1-09 to
P1-11) and SPD0~1 is used to select speed command. The same as speed command, the
torque command can be the external analog voltage or internal parameters (P1-12 to P1-
14) and TCM0~1 is used to select torque command. The speed and torque mode
switching is controlled by the S-T signal.
The timing chart of speed / torque control mode selection is shown as the figure below:

In torque mode (when S-T is ON), torque command is selected by TCM0~1. When
switching to the speed mode (when S-T is OFF), the speed command is selected by
SPD0~1, and then the motor will immediately rotate following the command. After S-T is
ON again, it will immediately return to torque mode.

6.5.3 Torque / Position Control Mode Selection

PT-T Mode:
The command source of PT-T mode is from external input pulse. The torque command
can be the external input pulse or internal parameters (P1-12 to P1-14). The torque and
position mode switching is controlled by T-P signal.
The timing chart of speed / position control mode selection is shown as the figure below:

6-36 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

6.6 Others

6.6.1 Speed Limit

The max. servo motor speed can be limited by using parameter P1-55 no matter in
position, speed or torque control mode.
The command source of speed limit command is the same as speed command. It can be
the external analog voltage but also can be internal parameters (P1-09 to P1-11). For
more information of speed command source, please refer to chapter 6.3.1.
The speed limit only can be used in torque mode (T mode) to limit the servo motor speed.
When the torque command is the external analog voltage, there should be surplus DI
signal that can be treated as SPD0~1 and be used to select speed limit command (internal
parameter). If there is not enough DI signal, the external voltage input can be used as
speed limit command. When the Disable / Enable Speed Limit Function Settings in
parameter P1-02 is set to 1, the speed limit function is activated.
The timing chart of speed limit is shown as the figure below:
Disable / Enable Speed Limit Function
Settings in parameter P1-02 is set to 1
Disable / Enable Speed Limit Function
Settings in parameter P1-02 is set to 0

SPD0~1 INVALID SPD0~1 VALID

Command Source Selection of Speed Limit

6.6.2 Torque Limit

The command source of torque limit command is the same as torque command. It can be
the external analog voltage but also can be internal parameters (P1-12 to P1-14). For
more information of torque command source, please refer to chapter 6.4.1.
The torque limit only can be used in position mode (PT mode) and speed mode (S mode)
to limit the output torque of servo motor. When the position command is the external
pulse and speed command is the external analog voltage, there should be surplus DI
signal that can be treated as TCM0~1 used to select torque limit command (internal
parameter). If there is not enough DI signal, the external voltage input can be used as
torque limit command. When the Disable / Enable Torque Limit Function Settings in
parameter P1-02 is set to 1, the torque limit function is activated.
The timing chart of torque limit is shown as the figure below:
Disable / Enable Torque Limit Function
Settings in parameter P1-02 is set to 1
Disable / Enable Torque Limit Function
Settings in parameter P1-02 is set to 0

TCM0~1 INVALID TCM0~1 VALID

Command Source Selection of Torque Limit

Revision June 2010 6-37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

6.6.3 Analog Monitor

User can use analog monitor to observe the required analog voltage signals. ASDA-B2
series provide two analog channels, they are PIN No. 1 and 3 of CN5 connector. The
parameters relative to analog monitor are shown below.

Relevant parameters:
Communication Addr.:
P0 - 03 MON Analog Monitor Output
0006H, 0007H

Default: 01 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 4.3.5
Unit: N/A
Range: 00 ~ 77
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: HEX
Settings:

A: CH1
B: CH2
not used
AB: (A: CH1; B: CH2)
0: Motor speed (+/-8 V/maximum rotation speed)
1: Motor torque (+/-8 V/maximum torque)
2: Pulse command frequency (+8 Volts /4.5Mpps)
3: Speed command (+/-8 Volts /maximum speed command)
4: Torque command (+/-8 Volts /maximum torque command)
5: V_BUS voltage (+/-8 Volts /450V)
6: Reserve
7: Reserve
Note: For the setting of analog output voltage proportion, refer to the P1-04 and
P1-05
Example: P0-03 = 01(CH1 is speed analog output)
Motor rotation speed = (Max. rotation speed × V1/8) × P1-04/100, when the output
voltage value of CH1 is V1.

6-38 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

Communication Addr.:
P1 - 03 AOUT Pulse Output Polarity Setting
0106H, 0107H

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 3.3.3
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 3
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: HEX
Settings:
Monitor analog output polarity
• A=0: MON1(+), MON2(+)
• A=1: MON1(+), MON2(-)
A
• A=2: MON1(-), MON2(+)
B • A=3: MON1(-), MON2(-)
not used

Pulse output polarity

• B=0: Forward output
• B=1: Reverse output

Communication Addr.:
P1 - 04 MON1 Analog Monitor Output Proportion 1(CH1)
0108H, 0109H

Default: 100 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.4.4
Unit: % (full scale)
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC

Communication Addr.:
P1 - 05 MON2 Analog Monitor Output Proportion 2(CH2)
0108H, 0109H

Default: 100 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.4.4
Unit: % (full scale)
Range: 0~100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC

Revision June 2010 6-39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

Analog Monitor Output Drift Adjustment Communication Addr.:

P4 - 20 DOF1
(CH1) 0428H, 0429H

Default: Factory setting Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.4.4
Unit: mV
Range: -800~800
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
This parameter cannot be reset.

Analog Monitor Output Drift Adjustment Communication Addr.:

P4 - 21 DOF2
(CH2) 042AH, 042BH

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.4.4
Unit: mV
Range: -800~800
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
This parameter cannot be reset.

For example, when the users want to observe the analog voltage signal of channel 1, if
the monitor output setting range is 8V per 325Kpps, then it is needed to change the
setting value of parameter P1-04 (Analog Monitor Output Proportion 1) to 50
(=325Kpps/Max. input frequency). Other related parameters setting include parameter P0-
03 (A=3) and P1-03 (A=0~3, output polarity setting). In general, when output voltage
value of Ch1 is V1, the pulse command frequency is equal to (Max. input frequency ×
V1/8) × P1-04/100.
Because there is an offset value of analog monitor output voltage, the zero voltage level
of analog monitor output does not match to the zero point of setting value. We
recommend the users can use Analog Monitor Output Drift Adjustment, DOF1 (parameter
P4-20) and DOF2 (parameter P4-21) to improve this condition. The maximum output
voltage range of analog monitor output is ±8V. If the output voltage exceed its limit, it is
still limited within the range of ±8V. The revolution provided by ASDA-B2 series is 10bit,
approximated to 13mv/LSB.

6-40 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

8V

DOF

-8V

6.6.4 Electromagnetic Brake

When the servo drive is operating, if the digital output BRKR is set to Off, it indicates the
electromagnetic brake is disabled and motor is stop running and locked. If the digital
output BRKR is set to ON, it indicates electromagnetic brake is enabled and motor can run
freely.
There are two parameters that affect the electromagnetic brake. One is parameter P1-42
(MBT1) and the other is parameter P1-43 (MBT2). The users can use these two parameters
to set the On and Off delay time of electromagnetic brake. The electromagnetic brake is
usually used in perpendicular axis (Z-axis) direction to reduce the large energy generated
from servo motor. Using electromagnetic brake can avoid the load may slip since there is
no motor holding torque when power is off. Without using electromagnetic brake may
reduce the life of servo motor. To avoid malfunction, the electromagnetic brake should be
activated after servo system is off (Servo Off).
If the users desire to control electromagnetic brake via external controller, not by the
servo drive, the users must execute the function of electromagnetic brake during the
period of time when servo motor is braking. The braking strength of motor and
electromagnetic brake must be in the same direction when servo motor is braking. Then,
the servo drive will operate normally. However, the servo drive may generate larger
current during acceleration or at constant speed and it may the cause of overload (servo
fault).

Revision June 2010 6-41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

Timing chart for using servo motor with electromagnetic brake:

ON
SON
OFF OFF
(DI Input)
ON
BRKR OFF OFF
(DO Output)

MBT1(P1-42) MBT2(P1-43)

ZSPD(P1-38)
Motor Speed

BRKR output timing explanation:

1. When SERVO OFF (when DI SON is not activated), the BRKR output goes Off
(electromagnetic brake is locked) after the delay time set by P1-43 is reached and
the motor speed is still higher than the setting value of P1-38.
2. When SERVO OFF (when DI SON is not activated), the BRKR output goes Off
(electromagnetic brake is locked) if the delay time set by P1-43 is not reached and
the motor speed is still lower than the setting value of P1-38.

Electromagnetic Brake Wiring Diagram

NOTE

1) Please refer to Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring for more wiring information.
2) The BRKR signal is used to control the brake operation. The VDD DC24V power supply
of the servo drive can be used to power the relay coil (Relay). When BRKR signal is ON,
the motor brake will be activated.
3) Please note that the coil of brake has no polarity.
4) The power supply for brake is DC24V. Never use it for VDD, the +24V source voltage.

6-42 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

The timing charts of control circuit power and main circuit power:

L1, L2
Control Circuit
Power
1 sec
5V
Control Circuit
Power
> 0msec
R, S, T
Main Circuit
Power
800ms

BUS Voltage
READY
2 sec
SERVO
READY

SERVO ON
(DI Input)
1 msec (min)+ Response Filter Time of Digital Input ( P2-09)

SERVO ON
(DO Output)
Input available
Position \ Speed \
Torque Command
Input

Revision June 2010 6-43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation

This page intentionally left blank

6-44 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

7.1 Definition

There are following five groups for drive parameters:

Group 0: Monitor parameters (example: P0-xx)
Group 1: Basic parameters (example: P1-xx)
Group 2: Extension parameters (example: P2-xx)
Group 3: Communication parameters (example: P3-xx)
Group 4: Diagnosis parameters (example: P4-xx)

Abbreviation of control modes:

PT: Position control mode (command from external signal)
S : Speed control mode
T : Torque control mode

Explanation of symbols (marked after parameter)

(★) Read-only register, such as P0-00, P0-01, P4-00.
(▲) Parameter cannot be set when Servo On (when the servo drive is enabled), such as P1-00,
P1-46 and P2-33.
(z) Parameter is effective only after the servo drive is restarted (after switching power off
and on), such as P1-01 and P3-00.
(„) Parameter setting values are not retained when power is off, such as P2-31 and P3-06.

Revision June 2010 7-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

7.2 Parameters Summary

Monitor and General Use

Control Mode Related

Parameter Name Function Default Unit
PT S T Section

Factory
P0-00★ VER Firmware Version N/A O O O -
Setting
11.1
P0-01„ ALE Drive Fault Code N/A N/A O O O 11.2
11.3
Drive Status (Front Panel
P0-02 STS 00 N/A O O O 7.2
Display)
P0-03 MON Analog Monitor Output 01 N/A O O O 4.3.5
P0-08★ TSON Servo Startup Time 0 Hour -
P0-09★ CM1 Status Monitor 1 N/A N/A O O O 4.3.5
P0-10★ CM2 Status Monitor 2 N/A N/A O O O 4.3.5
P0-11★ CM3 Status Monitor 3 N/A N/A O O O 4.3.5
P0-12★ CM4 Status Monitor 4 N/A N/A O O O 4.3.5
P0-13★ CM5 Status Monitor 5 N/A N/A O O O 4.3.5

P0-17 CM1A Status Monitor Selection 1 0 N/A -

P0-18 CM2A Status Monitor Selection 2 0 N/A -

P0-19 CM3A Status Monitor Selection 3 0 N/A -

P0-20 CM4A Status Monitor Selection 4 0 N/A -

P0-21 CM5A Status Monitor Selection 5 0 N/A -

P0-46★ SVSTS Servo Output Status Display 0 N/A O O O -
Analog Monitor Output %(full
P1-04 MON1 100 O O O 6.4.4
Proportion 1 (CH1) scale)
Analog Monitor Output %(full
P1-05 MON2 100 O O O 6.4.4
Proportion 2 (CH2) scale)

Explanation of symbols (marked after parameter)

(★) Read-only register.
(▲) Parameter cannot be set when Servo On (when the servo drive is enabled).
(z) Parameter is effective only after the servo drive is restarted (after switching power off and
on).
(„) Parameter setting values are not retained when power is off.

7-2 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Smooth Filter and Resonance Suppression

Control Mode Related
Parameter Name Function Default Unit
PT S T Section

Accel / Decel Smooth Constant

P1-06 SFLT of Analog Speed Command 0 ms O 6.3.3
(Low-pass Filter)
Smooth Constant of Analog
P1-07 TFLT Torque Command (Low-pass 0 ms O 6.4.3
Filter)
Smooth Constant of Position
P1-08 PFLT 0 10ms O 6.2.6
Command (Low-pass Filter)
P1-34 TACC Acceleration Time 200 ms O 6.3.3

P1-35 TDEC Deceleration Time 200 ms O 6.3.3

P1-36 TSL Accel /Decel S-curve 0 ms O 6.3.3

Analog Speed Linear Filter
P1-59 MFLT 0 0.1ms O -
(Moving Filter)
Friction Compensation
P1-62 FRCL 0 % O O O -
Percentage
Friction Compensation Smooth
P1-63 FRCT 0 ms O O O -
Constant
Position Command Moving
P1-68 PFLT2 0 ms O -
Filter
Notch Filter 1 (Resonance
P2-23 NCF1 1000 Hz O O O 6.3.7
Suppression)
Notch Filter Attenuation Rate 1
P2-24 DPH1 0 dB O O O 6.3.7
(Resonance Suppression)
Notch Filter 2 (Resonance
P2-43 NCF2 1000 Hz O O O 6.3.7
Suppression)
Notch Filter Attenuation Rate 2
P2-44 DPH2 0 dB O O O 6.3.7
(Resonance Suppression)
Notch Filter 3 (Resonance
P2-45 NCF3 1000 Hz O O O 6.3.7
Suppression)
Notch Filter Attenuation Rate 3
P2-46 DPH3 0 dB O O O 6.3.7
(Resonance Suppression)
Auto Resonance Suppression
P2-47 ANCF 1 N/A O O O -
Mode Selection
Auto Resonance Suppression
P2-48 ANCL 100 N/A O O O -
Detection Level
Low-pass Filter Time Constant
P2-25 NLP 2 or 5 0.1ms O O O 6.3.7
(Resonance Suppression)
Speed Detection Filter and Jitter
P2-49 SJIT 0 sec O O O -
Suppression

Explanation of symbols (marked after parameter)

(★) Read-only register.
(▲) Parameter cannot be set when Servo On (when the servo drive is enabled).
(z) Parameter is effective only after the servo drive is restarted (after switching power off and
on).
(„) Parameter setting values are not retained when power is off.

Revision June 2010 7-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Gain and Switch

Control Mode Related
Parameter Name Function Default Unit
PT S T Section

P2-00 KPP Proportional Position Loop Gain 35 rad/s O 6.2.8

Position Loop Gain Switching
P2-01 PPR 100 % O 6.2.8
Rate
P2-02 PFG Position Feed Forward Gain 50 % O 6.2.8
Smooth Constant of Position
P2-03 PFF 5 ms O -
Feed Forward Gain
P2-04 KVP Proportional Speed Loop Gain 500 rad/s O O O 6.3.6

P2-05 SPR Speed Loop Gain Switching Rate 100 % O O O -

P2-06 KVI Speed Integral Compensation 100 rad/s O O O 6.3.6

P2-07 KVF Speed Feed Forward Gain 0 % O O O 6.3.6

P2-26 DST External Anti-Interference Gain 0 0.001 O O O -

Gain Switching Control
P2-27 GCC 0 N/A O O O -
Selection
P2-28 GUT Gain Switching Time Constant 10 10ms O O O -
pulse
P2-29 GPE Gain Switching Condition 1280000 Kpps O O O -
r/min
Speed Frequency Response 5.6
P2-31 AUT1 Level in Auto and Semi-Auto 80 Hz O O O
Mode 6.3.6

5.6
P2-32▲ AUT2 Tuning Mode Selection 0 N/A O O O
6.3.6

Explanation of symbols (marked after parameter)

(★) Read-only register.
(▲) Parameter cannot be set when Servo On (when the servo drive is enabled).
(z) Parameter is effective only after the servo drive is restarted (after switching power off and
on).
(„) Parameter setting values are not retained when power is off.

7-4 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Position Control
Control Mode Related
Parameter Name Function Default Unit
PT S T Section

pulse
Control Mode and Output
P1-01z CTL 0 r/min O O O 6.1
Direction
N-M
P1-02▲ PSTL Speed and Torque Limit 0 N/A O O O 6.6
P1-12 ~
TQ1 ~ 3 1st ~ 3rd Torque Limit 100 % O O O 6.4.1
P1-14
P1-46▲ GR3 Encoder Output Pulse Number 2500 pulse O O O -

P1-55 MSPD Maximum Speed Limit rated r/min O O O -

P2-50 DCLR Pulse Deviation Clear Mode 0 N/A O -

External Pulse Control Command (PT mode)

P1-00▲ PTT External Pulse Input Type 0x2 N/A O 6.2.1

Electronic Gear Ratio (1st
P1-44▲ GR1 1 pulse O 6.2.5
Numerator) (N1)
Electronic Gear Ratio
P1-45▲ GR2 1 pulse O 6.3.6
(Denominator) (M)
Electronic Gear Ratio (2nd
P2-60▲ GR4 1 pulse O -
Numerator) (N2)
Electronic Gear Ratio (3rd
P2-61▲ GR5 1 pulse O -
Numerator) (N3)
Electronic Gear Ratio (4th
P2-62▲ GR6 1 pulse O -
Numerator) (N4)

Explanation of symbols (marked after parameter)

(★) Read-only register.
(▲) Parameter cannot be set when Servo On (when the servo drive is enabled).
(z) Parameter is effective only after the servo drive is restarted (after switching power off and
on).
(„) Parameter setting values are not retained when power is off.

Revision June 2010 7-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Speed Control
Control Mode Related
Parameter Name Function Default Unit
PT S T Section

pulse
Control Mode and Output
P1-01z CTL 0 r/min O O O 6.1
Direction
N-M
P1-02▲ PSTL Speed and Torque Limit 0 N/A O O O 6.6

P1-46▲ GR3 Encoder Output Pulse Number 1 pulse O O O -

P1-55 MSPD Maximum Speed Limit rated r/min O O O -

1000
P1-09 ~ 0.1
SP1 ~ 3 1st ~ 3rd Speed Command ~ O O 6.3.1
P1-11 r/min
3000
P1-12 ~
TQ1 ~ 3 1st ~ 3rd Torque Limit 100 % O O O 6.6.2
P1-14
Max. Analog Speed Command or
P1-40▲ VCM rated r/min O O 6.3.4
Limit
Max. Analog Torque Command
P1-41▲ TCM 100 % O O O -
or Limit
Max. Rotation Speed of Encoder
P1-76 AMSPD 5500 r/min O O O -
Output

Explanation of symbols (marked after parameter)

(★) Read-only register.
(▲) Parameter cannot be set when Servo On (when the servo drive is enabled).
(z) Parameter is effective only after the servo drive is restarted (after switching power off and
on).
(„) Parameter setting values are not retained when power is off.

7-6 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Torque Control
Control Mode Related
Parameter Name Function Default Unit
PT S T Section

pulse
Control Mode and Output
P1-01z CTL 0 r/min O O O 6.1
Direction
N-M
P1-02▲ PSTL Speed and Torque Limit 0 N/A O O O 6.6

P1-46▲ GR3 Encoder Output Pulse Number 1 pulse O O O -

P1-55 MSPD Maximum Speed Limit rated r/min O O O -

P1-09 1000
~ SP1~3 1st ~ 3rd Speed Limit ~ r/min O O 6.6.1
P1-11 3000
P1-12
~ TQ1~3 1st ~ 3rd Torque Command 100 % O O O 6.4.1
P1-14
Max. Analog Speed Command or
P1-40▲ VCM rated r/min O O -
Limit
Max. Analog Torque Command
P1-41▲ TCM 100 % O O O 6.4.4
or Limit

Explanation of symbols (marked after parameter)

(★) Read-only register.
(▲) Parameter cannot be set when Servo On (when the servo drive is enabled).
(z) Parameter is effective only after the servo drive is restarted (after switching power off and
on).
(„) Parameter setting values are not retained when power is off.

Revision June 2010 7-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Digital I/O and Relative Input Output Setting

Control Mode Related
Parameter Name Function Default Unit
PT S T Section

P2-09 DRT Bounce Filter 2 2ms O O O -

P2-10 DI1 Digital Input Terminal 1 (DI1) 101 N/A O O O Table 7.A

P2-11 DI2 Digital Input Terminal 2 (DI2) 104 N/A O O O Table 7.A

P2-12 DI3 Digital Input Terminal 3 (DI3) 116 N/A O O O Table 7.A

P2-13 DI4 Digital Input Terminal 4 (DI4) 117 N/A O O O Table 7.A

P2-14 DI5 Digital Input Terminal 5 (DI5) 102 N/A O O O Table 7.A

P2-15 DI6 Digital Input Terminal 6 (DI6) 22 N/A O O O Table 7.A

P2-16 DI7 Digital Input Terminal 7 (DI7) 23 N/A O O O Table 7.A

P2-17 DI8 Digital Input Terminal 8 (DI8) 21 N/A O O O Table 7.A

External Digital Input Terminal 9
P2-36 DI9 0 N/A O O O Table 7.A
(DI9)
P2-18 DO1 Digital Output Terminal 1 (DO1) 101 N/A O O O Table 7.B

P2-19 DO2 Digital Output Terminal 2 (DO2) 103 N/A O O O Table 7.B

P2-20 DO3 Digital Output Terminal 3 (DO3) 109 N/A O O O Table 7.B

P2-21 DO4 Digital Output Terminal 4 (DO4) 105 N/A O O O Table 7.B

P2-22 DO5 Digital Output Terminal 5 (DO5) 7 N/A O O O Table 7.B

P2-37 DO6 Digital Output Terminal 5 (DO5) 7 N/A O O O Table 7.B

0.1
P1-38 ZSPD Zero Speed Range Setting 100 O O O Table 7.B
r/min
P1-39 SSPD Target Motor Speed 3000 r/min O O O Table 7.B
On Delay Time of
P1-42 MBT1 0 ms O O O 6.5.5
Electromagnetic Brake
OFF Delay Time of
P1-43 MBT2 0 ms O O O 6.5.5
Electromagnetic Brake
P1-47 SCPD Speed Reached Output Range 10 r/min O Table 7.B

P1-54 PER Positioning Completed Width 12800 pulse O Table 7.B

P1-56 OVW Output Overload Warning Time 120 % O O O Table 7.B

Explanation of symbols (marked after parameter)

(★) Read-only register.
(▲) Parameter cannot be set when Servo On (when the servo drive is enabled).
(z) Parameter is effective only after the servo drive is restarted (after switching power off and
on).
(„) Parameter setting values are not retained when power is off.

7-8 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Communication
Control Mode Related
Parameter Name Function Default Unit
PT S T Section

P3-00z ADR Communication Address Setting 0x7F N/A O O O 8.2

P3-01 BRT Transmission Speed 0x0203 bps O O O 8.2

P3-02 PTL Communication Protocol 6 N/A O O O 8.2

P3-03 FLT Transmission Fault Treatment 0 N/A O O O 8.2

Communication Time Out

P3-04 CWD 0 sec O O O 8.2
Detection

P3-05 CMM Communication Selection 0 N/A O O O 8.2

Digital Input Communication

P3-06„ SDI 0 N/A O O O 8.2
Function

Communication Response Delay

P3-07 CDT 0 1ms O O O 8.2
Time

P3-08 MNS Monitor Mode 0000 N/A O O O 8.2

Explanation of symbols (marked after parameter)

(★) Read-only register.
(▲) Parameter cannot be set when Servo On (when the servo drive is enabled).
(z) Parameter is effective only after the servo drive is restarted (after switching power off and
on).
(„) Parameter setting values are not retained when power is off.

Revision June 2010 7-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Diagnosis

Control Mode Related

Parameter Name Function Default Unit
PT S T Section

P4-00★ ASH1 Fault Record (N) 0 N/A O O O 4.4.1

P4-01★ ASH2 Fault Record (N-1) 0 N/A O O O 4.4.1

P4-02★ ASH3 Fault Record (N-2) 0 N/A O O O 4.4.1

P4-03★ ASH4 Fault Record (N-3) 0 N/A O O O 4.4.1

P4-04★ ASH5 Fault Record (N-4) 0 N/A O O O 4.4.1

P4-05 JOG JOG Operation 20 r/min O O O 4.4.2

P4-06▲„ FOT Force Output Contact Control 0 N/A O O O 4.4.4
4.4.5
P4-07 ITST Input Status 0 N/A O O O
8.2
Digital Keypad Input of Servo
P4-08★ PKEY N/A N/A O O O -
Drive
P4-09★ MOT Output Status N/A N/A O O O 4.4.6
P4-10▲ CEN Adjustment Function 0 N/A O O O -
Analog Speed Input Drift Factory
P4-11 SOF1 N/A O O O -
Adjustment 1 Setting
Analog Speed Input Drift Factory
P4-12 SOF2 N/A O O O -
Adjustment 2 Setting
Analog Torque Drift Adjustment Factory
P4-14 TOF2 N/A O O O -
2 Setting
Current Detector Drift Factory
P4-15 COF1 N/A O O O -
Adjustment (V1 phase) Setting
Current Detector Drift Factory
P4-16 COF2 N/A O O O -
Adjustment (V2 phase) Setting
Current Detector Drift Factory
P4-17 COF3 N/A O O O -
Adjustment (W1 phase) Setting
Current Detector Drift Factory
P4-18 COF4 N/A O O O -
Adjustment (W2 phase) Setting
Factory
P4-19 TIGB IGBT NTC Calibration N/A O O O -
Setting
Analog Monitor Output Drift
P4-20 DOF1 0 mV O O O 6.4.4
Adjustment (CH1)
Analog Monitor Output Drift
P4-21 DOF2 0 mV O O O 6.4.4
Adjustment (CH2)
P4-22 SAO Analog Speed Input Offset 0 mV O -

P4-23 TAO Analog Torque Input Offset 0 mV O -

Explanation of symbols (marked after parameter)

(★) Read-only register.
(▲) Parameter cannot be set when Servo On (when the servo drive is enabled).
(z) Parameter is effective only after the servo drive is restarted (after switching power off and
on).
(„) Parameter setting values are not retained when power is off.

7-10 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

7.3 Detailed Parameter Listings

Group 0: P0-xx Monitor Parameters

P0 - 00★ VER Firmware Version Address: 0000H, 0001H

Default: Factory setting Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal

P0 - 01■ ALE Drive Fault Code Address: 0002H, 0003H

Default: N/A Related Section: Chapter 11

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 001 ~ 380
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: BCD
Settings:
This parameter shows the current servo drive fault if the servo drive is currently
faulted.
The fault code is hexadecimal data but displayed in BCD format (Binary coded
decimal).
Servo Drive Fault Codes:
001: Overcurrent
002: Overvoltage
003: Undervoltage (This fault code shows when main circuit voltage is below its
minimum specified value while Servo On, and it will not show while Servo Off.
This fault code can’t be cleared automatically after the voltage has returned
within its specification. Please refer to parameter P2-66.)
004: Motor error (The drive and motor are not correctly matched for size (power
rating).
005: Regeneration error
006: Overload
007: Overspeed
008: Abnormal pulse control command
009: Excessive deviation
010: Reserved

Revision June 2010 7-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

011: Encoder error (The wiring of the encoder is in error and this causes the
communication error between the servo drive and the encoder.)
012: Adjustment error
013: Emergency stop activated
014: Reverse limit switch error
015: Forward limit switch error
016: IGBT temperature error
017: Memory error
018: Encoder output error
019: Serial communication error
020: Serial communication time out
021: Reserved
022: Input power phase loss
023: Pre-overload warning
024: Encoder initial magnetic field error
025: Encoder internal error
026: Encoder data error
027: Encoder internal reset error
030: Motor protection error
031: U, V, W wiring error
099: DSP firmware upgrade

P0 - 02 STS Drive Status (Front Panel Display) Address: 0004H, 0005H

Default: 00 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 4.3.5, Section 7.2
Unit: N/A
Range:0~18
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter shows the servo drive status.
00: Motor feedback pulse number (after electronic gear ratio is set) [user unit]
01: Input pulse number of pulse command (after electronic gear ratio is set) [user
unit]
02: Position error counts between control command pulse and feedback pulse
[user unit]
03: Motor feedback pulse number (encoder unit, 1280000 pulse/rev) [pulse]
04: Input pulse number of pulse command (before electronic gear ratio is set)
[pulse]

7-12 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

05: Position error counts [pulse]

06: Input frequency of pulse command [Kpps]
07: Motor rotation speed [r/min]
08: Speed input command [Volt]
09: Speed input command [r/min]
10: Torque input command [Volt]
11: Torque input command [%]
12: Average load [%]
13: Peak load [%]
14: Main circuit voltage [Volt]
15: Ratio of load inertia to Motor inertia [0.1times]
16: IGBT temperature
17: Resonance frequency [Hz]
18: Absolute pulse number relative to encoder (use Z phase as home). The value of
Z phase home point is 0, and it can be the value from -5000 to +5000 pulses.

P0 - 03 MON Analog Monitor Output Address: 0006H, 0007H

Default: 01 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 4.3.5
Unit: N/A
Range: 00 ~ 77
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter determines the functions of the analog monitor outputs.

XY: (X: CH1; Y: CH2)

0: Motor speed (+/-8V / maximum motor speed)
1: Motor torque (+/-8V / maximum torque)
2: Pulse command frequency (+8Volts / 4.5Mpps)
3: Speed command (+/-8Volts / maximum speed command)
4: Torque command (+/-8Volts / maximum torque command)

Revision June 2010 7-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

5: V_BUS voltage (+/-8Volts / 450V)

6: Reserved
7: Reserved
Please note: For the setting of analog output voltage proportion, refer to the P1-04
and P1-05.
Example:
P0-03 = 01(CH1 is speed analog output)
Motor speed = (Max. motor speed × V1/8) × P1-04/100, when the output voltage
value of CH1 is V1.

P0 - 04■ Reserved (Do Not Use)

P0 - 05■ Reserved (Do Not Use)

P0 - 06■ Reserved (Do Not Use)

P0 - 07■ Reserved (Do Not Use)

P0 - 08★ TSON Servo Startup Time Address: 0010H, 0011H

Default: 0 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: Hour
Range: 0 ~ 65535
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal

P0 - 09★ CM1 Status Monitor 1 Address: 0012H, 0013H

Default: N/A Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 4.3.5
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to provide the value of one of the status monitoring
functions found in P0-02. The value of P0-09 is determined by P0-17 (desired drive
status) through communication setting or the keypad. The drive status can be read
from the communication address of this parameter via communication port.
For example:
Set P0-17 to 3, then all consequent reads of P0-09 will return the motor feedback

7-14 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

pulse number in pulse.

When reading the drive status through Modbus communication, the system should
read two 16-bit data stored in the addresses of 0012H and 0013H to form a 32-bit
data.
(0013H : 0012H) = (high byte : low byte)
When reading the drive ststus through the keypad, if P0-02 is set to 23, VAR-1 will
quickly show for about two seconds and then the value of P0-09 will display on the
display.

P0 - 10★ CM2 Status Monitor 2 Address: 0014H, 0015H

Default: N/A Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 4.3.5
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to provide the value of one of the status monitoring
functions found in P0-02. The value of P0-10 is determined by P0-18 (desired drive
status) through communication setting or the keypad. The drive status can be read
from the communication address of this parameter via communication port.
When reading the drive status through the keypad, if P0-02 is set to 24, VAR-2 will
quickly show for about two seconds and then the value of P0-10 will display on the
display.

P0 -11★ CM3 Status Monitor 3 Address: 0016H, 0017H

Default: N/A Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 4.3.5
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to provide the value of one of the status monitoring
functions found in P0-02. The value of P0-11 is determined by P0-19 (desired drive
status) through communication setting or the keypad. The drive status can be read
from the communication address of this parameter via communication port.
When reading the drive status through the keypad, if P0-02 is set to 25, VAR-3 will
quickly show for about two seconds and then the value of P0-11 will display on the
display.

Revision June 2010 7-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P0 - 12★ CM4 Status Monitor 4 Address: 0018H, 0019H

Default: N/A Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 4.3.5
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to provide the value of one of the status monitoring
functions found in P0-02. The value of P0-12 is determined by P0-20 (desired drive
status) through communication setting or the keypad. The drive status can be read
from the communication address of this parameter via communication port.
When reading the drive status through the keypad, if P0-02 is set to 26, VAR-4 will
quickly show for about two seconds and then the value of P0-12 will display on the
display.

P0 - 13★ CM5 Status Monitor 5 Address: 001AH, 001BH

Default: N/A Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 4.3.5
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to provide the value of one of the status monitoring
functions found in P0-02. The value of P0-12 is determined by P0-20 (desired drive
status) through communication setting or the keypad. The drive status can be read
from the communication address of this parameter via communication port.

P0 - 14 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P0 - 15 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P0 - 16 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P0 - 17 CM1A Status Monitor Selection 1 Address: 0022H, 0023H

Default: 0 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 18

7-16 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Data Size: 16-bit

Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to determine the drive status found in P0-02. The selected
drive status will be displayed by P0-09.
For example:
Set P0-17 to 7, then all consequent reads of P0-09 will return the motor rotation
speed in r/min.

P0 - 18 CM2A Status Monitor Selection 2 Address: 0024H, 0025H

Default: 0 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 18
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to determine the drive status found in P0-02.

P0 - 19 CM3A Status Monitor Selection 3 Address: 0026H, 0027H

Default: 0 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 18
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to determine the drive status found in P0-02.

P0 - 20 CM4A Status Monitor Selection 4 Address: 0028H, 0029H

Default: 0 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 18
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to determine the drive status found in P0-02.

Revision June 2010 7-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P0 - 21 CM5A Status Monitor Selection 5 Address: 002AH, 002BH

Default: 0 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 18
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to determine the drive status found in P0-02.

P0 - 22 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P0 - 23 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P0 - 24 Reserved (Do Not Use)

Status Monitor Register (PC Software

P0 - 44 PCMN Address: 0058H, 0059H
Setting)

Default: 0x0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 4.3.5
Unit: N/A
Range: determined by the communication address of the designated parameter
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
The function of this parameter is the same as P0-09 (Please refer to P0-09). Please
note that this pamameter can be set through communication setting only.

Status Monitor Register Selection (PC

P0 - 45■ PCMNA Address: 005AH, 005BH
Software Setting)

Default: 0x0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 4.3.5
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 127
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
The function of this parameter is the same as P0-17 (Please refer to P0-17). Please
note that this pamameter can be set through communication setting only.

7-18 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P0 - 46★ SVSTS Servo Output Status Display Address: 005CH, 005DH

Default: 0 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0x00 ~ 0xFF
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to display the digital output signal of the servo drive. The
servo output status display will show in hexadecimal format.
Bit0: SRDY (Servo ready)
Bit1: SON (Servo On)
Bit2: ZSPD (At Zero speed)
Bit3: TSPD (At Speed reached)
Bit4: TPOS (At Positioning completed)
Bit5: TQL (At Torque limit)
Bit6: ALRM (Servo alarm activated)
Bit7: BRKR (Electromagnetic brake control)
Bit9: OLW (Output overload warning)
Bit10: WARN (Servo warning activated. WARN is activated when the drive has
detected reverse limit error; forward limit error, emergency stop, serial
communication error, and undervoltage these fault conditions.)
Bit11: Reserved
Bit12: Reserved
Bit13: Reserved
Bit14: Reserved
Bit15: Reserved
The servo output status display can be monitored through communication also.

Revision June 2010 7-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Group 1: P1-xx Basic Parameters

P1 - 00▲ PTT External Pulse Input Type Address: 0100H, 0101H

Default: 0x2 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: PT Section 6.2.1
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 1132
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:

A: Input pulse type

0: AB phase pulse (4x) (Quadrature Input)
1: Clockwise (CW) + Counterclockwise(CCW) pulse
2: Pulse + Direction
3: Other settings:

B: Input pulse filter

This setting is used to suppress or reduce the chatter caused by the noise, etc.
However, if the instant input pulse filter frequency is over high, the frequency that
exceeds the setting value will be regarded as noise and filtered.
B Low Filter Setting Value High Filter
0 1.66Mpps 0 6.66Mpps
1 416Kpps 1 1.66Mpps
2 208Kpps 2 833Kpps
3 104Kpps 3 416Kpps

7-20 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

C: Input polarity

Logic Pulse Type Forward Reverse

AB phase
pulse
Positive CW + CCW
0
Logic pulse
Pulse +
Direction

AB phase
pulse

Negative CW + CCW
1
Logic pulse

Pulse +
Direction

Max. Min. time width

input
Pulse specification
pulse T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
frequency
High-speed Line
4Mpps 62.5ns 125ns 250ns 200ns 125ns 125ns
pulse receiver
Line
500Kpps 0.5μs 1μs 2μs 2μs 1μs 1μs
Low-speed driver
pulse Open
200Kpps 1.25μs 2.5μs 5μs 5μs 2.5μs 2.5μs
collector

Max. input pulse Voltage Forward

Pulse specification
frequency specification specification
Line
High-speed pulse 4Mpps 5V < 25mA
receiver
Line
500Kpps 2.8V ~ 3.7V < 25mA
driver
Low-speed pulse
Open
200Kpps 24V (Max.) < 25mA
collector
D: Source of pulse command

Setting
Input pulse interface Remark
value
Open collector for CN1 Terminal Identification:
0
low-speed pulse PULSE, SIGN
Line driver for CN1 Terminal Identification:
1
high-speed pulse PULSE_D, SIGN_D

Revision June 2010 7-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P0 - 01z CTL Control Mode and Output Direction Address: 0102H, 0103H

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.1, Table 7.A
Unit: pulse (P mode), r/min (S mode), N-m (T mode)
Range: 00 ~ 110F
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:

A: Control mode settings

Mode PT S T Sz Tz
Single Mode
00 ▲
01 Reserved
02 ▲
03 ▲
04 ▲
05 ▲
Multiple Mode
06 ▲ ▲
07 ▲ ▲
08 Reserved
09 Reserved
0A ▲ ▲
Single Mode:
PT: Position control mode. The command is from external pulse or
analog voltage (external analog voltage will be available soon).
Execution of the command selection is via DI signal, PTAS.
S: Speed control mode. The command is from external signal or internal
signal. Execution of the command selection is via DI signals, SPD0
and SPD1.
T: Torque control mode. The command is from external signal or
internal signal. Execution of the command selection is via DI signals,
TCM0 and TCM1.

7-22 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Sz: Zero speed / internal speed command

Tz: Zero torque / internal torque command
Multiple Mode: Control of the mode selection is via DI signals. For
example, either PT or S control mode can be selected via
DI signals, S-P (see Table 7.A).
B: Torque output direction settings
Direction 0 1

Forward

Reverse

P0 - 02▲ PSTL Speed and Torque Limit Address: 0104H, 0105H

Default: 00 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.6, Table 7.A
Unit: N/A
Range: 00 ~ 11
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:

A: Disable or Enable speed limit function

0: Disable speed limit function
1: Enable speed limit function (It is available in torque mode)

B: Disable or Enable torque limit function

0: Disable torque limit function
1: Enable torque limit function (It is available in position and speed mode)

Revision June 2010 7-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

This parameter is used to determine that the speed and torque limit functions are
enabled or disabled. If P1-02 is set to 11, it indicates that the speed and torque
limit functions are enabled always. The users can also use DI signals, SPDLM and
TRQLM to enable the speed and torque limit functions. Please note that DI signals,
SPD0, SPD1, TCM0, and TCM1 are used to select the command source of the speed
and torque limit.

P1 - 03 AOUT Pulse Output Polarity Setting Address: 0106H, 0107H

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 3.3.3
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 13
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:

A: Analog monitor outputs polarity B: Position pulse outputs polarity

0: MON1(+), MON2(+) 0: Forward output
1: MON1(+), MON2(-) 1: Reverse output
2: MON1(-), MON2(+)
3: MON1(-), MON2(-)

Analog Monitor Output Proportion 1

P1 - 04 MON1 Address: 0108H, 0109H
(CH1)

Default: 100 Related Section: Section 6.4.4

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: % (full scale)
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal

7-24 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Analog Monitor Output Proportion 2

P1 - 05 MON2 Address: 010AH, 010BH
(CH2)

Default: 100 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.4.4
Unit: % (full scale)
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal

Accel / Decel Smooth Constant of Analog

P1 - 06 SFLT Address: 010CH, 010DH
Speed Command (Low-pass Filter)

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: S Section 6.3.3
Unit: msec
Range: 0 ~ 1000 (0: Disabled)
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal

Smooth Constant of Analog Torque

P1 - 07 TFLT Address: 010EH, 010FH
Command (Low-pass Filter)

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: T Section 6.4.3
Unit: msec
Range: 0 ~ 1000 (0: Disabled)
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal

Smooth Constant of Position Command

P1 - 08 PFLT Address: 0110H, 0111H
(Low-pass Filter)

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: PT Section 6.2.6
Unit: 10msec
Range: 0 ~ 1000 (0: Disabled)
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal

Revision June 2010 7-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P1 - 09 SP1 1st Speed Command or Limit Address: 0112H, 0113H

Default: 1000 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: S, T Section 6.3.1
Unit: 0.1 r/min
Range: -50000 ~ +50000
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
1st Speed Command
In Speed mode, this parameter is used to set speed 1 of internal speed command.
1st Speed Limit
In Torque mode, this parameter is used to set speed limit 1 of internal speed
command.

P1 - 10 SP2 2nd Speed Command or Limit Address: 0114H, 0115H

Default: 2000 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: S, T Section 6.3.1
Unit: 0.1 r/min
Range: -50000 ~ +50000
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
2nd Speed Command
In Speed mode, this parameter is used to set speed 2 of internal speed command.
2nd Speed Limit
In Torque mode, this parameter is used to set speed limit 2 of internal speed
command.

P1 - 11 SP3 3rd Speed Command or Limit Address: 0116H, 0117H

Default: 3000 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: S, T Section 6.3.1
Unit: 0.1 r/min
Range: -50000 ~ +50000
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
3rd Speed Command
In Speed mode, this parameter is used to set speed 3 of internal speed command.

7-26 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

3rd Speed Limit

In Torque mode, this parameter is used to set speed limit 3 of internal speed
command.

P1 - 12 TQ1 1st Torque Command or Limit Address: 0118H, 0119H

Default: 100 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: T, P&S Section 6.4.1
Unit: %
Range: -300 ~ +300
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
1st Torque Command
In Torque mode, this parameter is used to set torque 1 of internal torque
command.
1st Torque Limit
In Position and Speed mode, this parameter is used to set torque limit 1 of internal
torque command.

P1 - 13 TQ2 2nd Torque Command or Limit Address: 011AH, 011BH

Default: 100 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: T, P&S Section 6.4.1
Unit: %
Range: -300 ~ +300
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
2nd Torque Command
In Torque mode, this parameter is used to set torque 2 of internal torque
command.
2nd Torque Limit
In Position and Speed mode, this parameter is used to set torque limit 2 of internal
torque command.

Revision June 2010 7-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P1 - 14 TQ3 3rd Torque Command or Limit Address: 011CH, 011DH

Default: 100 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: T, P&S Section6.4.1
Unit: %
Range: -300 ~ +300
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
3rd Speed Command
In Torque mode, this parameter is used to set torque 3 of internal torque
command.
3rd Speed Limit
In Position and Speed mode, this parameter is used to set torque limit 3 of internal
torque command.

P1 - 15 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 16 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 17 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 18 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 19 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 20 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 21 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 22 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 23 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 31 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 32 LSTP Motor Stop Mode Selection Address: 0140H, 0141H

Default: 0 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 20
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal

7-28 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Settings:

A: Fault Stop Mode

0: Stop instantly
1: Decelerate to stop
When a fault occurs (except for CWL, CCWL, EMGS and serial communication
error), it is used to set servo motor stop mode.
B: Dynamic Brake Option
0: Use dynamic brake
1: Allow servo motor to coast to stop
2: Use dynamic brake first, after the motor speed is below than P1-38, allow servo
motor to coast to stop
When Servo Off or a fault (servo alarm) occurs, it is used to set servo motor stop
mode.
When the fault NL(CWL) or PL(CCWL) occurs, please refer to the settings of
parameter P1-06, P1-35, P1-36 to determine the deceleration time. If the
deceleration time is set to 1msec, the motor will stop instantly.

P1 - 33 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 34 TACC Acceleration Time Address: 0144H, 0145H

Default: 200 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: S Section 6.3.3
Unit: msec
Range: 1 ~20000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to determine the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 to
its rated motor speed. The functions of parameters P1-34, P1-35 and P1-36 are
each individual.
Please note:
1. When the source of speed command is analog command, the maximum setting
value of P1-36 is set to 0, the acceleration and deceleration function will be
disabled.

Revision June 2010 7-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P1 - 35 TDEC Deceleration Time Address: 0146H, 0147H

Default: 200 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: S Section 6.3.3
Unit: msec
Range: 1 ~ 20000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to determine the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 to
its rated motor speed. The functions of parameters P1-34, P1-35 and P1-36 are
each individual.
Please note:
1. When the source of speed command is analog command, the maximum setting
value of P1-36 is set to 0, the acceleration and deceleration function will be
disabled.

P1 - 36 TSL Accel /Decel S-curve Address: 0148H, 0149H

Default: 0 Related Section:

Unit: msec Section 6.3.3
Applicable Control Mode: S
Unit: msec
Range: 0 ~ 10000 (0: Disabled)
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to make the motor run more smoothly when startup and
windup. Using this parameter can improve the motor running stability.

TACC: P1-34, Acceleration time

TDEC: P1-35, Deceleration time
TSL: P1-36, Accel /Decel S-curve
Total acceleration time = TACC + TSL
Total deceleration time = TDEC + TSL

7-30 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

The functions of parameters P1-34, P1-35 and P1-36 are each individual. When
P1-36 is set to 0 (Disabled), the settings of P1-34, P1-35 are still effective. It
indicates that the parameters P1-34 and P1-35 will not become disabled even
when P1-36 is disabled.
Please note:
1. When the source of speed command is analog command, the maximum setting
value of P1-36 is set to 0, the acceleration and deceleration function will be
disabled.

Ratio of Load Inertia to Servo Motor

P1 - 37 GDR Address: 014AH, 014BH
Inertia

Default: 10 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: 0.1 times
Range: 0 ~ 2000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Ratio of load inertia to servo motor inertia (for Rotation Motor): (J_load
/J_motor)
J_load: Total equivalent moment of inertia of external mechanical load
J_motor: Moment of inertia of servo motor
Ratio of load weight to servo motor weight (for Linear Motor): (M_load
/M_motor)(not available now but will be available soon)
M_load: Total equivalent weight of external mechanical load
M_motor: Weight of servo motor

P1 - 38 ZSPD Zero Speed Range Setting Address: 014CH, 014DH

Default: 100 Related Section: Table 7.B

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: 0.1 r/min
Range: 0 ~ 2000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set output range of zero speed signal (ZSPD) and
determine when zero speed signal (ZSPD) becomes activated. ZSPD is activated
when the drive senses the motor is equal to or below the Zero Speed Range setting
as defined in parameter P1-38.

Revision June 2010 7-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

For Example, at default ZSPD will be activated when the drive detects the motor
rotating at speed at or below 100 r/min. ZSPD will remain activated until the motor
speed increases above 100 r/min.

P1 - 39 SSPD Target Motor Speed Address: 014EH, 014FH

Default: 3000 Related Section: Table 7.B

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: r/min
Range: 0 ~ 5000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
When target motor speed reaches its preset value, digital output (TSPD) is enabled.
When the forward and reverse speed of servo motor is equal and higher than the
setting value, the motor will reach the target motor speed, and then TSPD signal
will output.
TSPD is activated once the drive has detected the motor has reached the Target
Motor Speed setting as defined in parameter P1-39. TSPD will remain activated
until the motor speed drops below the Target Motor Speed.

P1 - 40▲ VCM Max. Analog Speed Command or Limit Address: 0150H, 0151H

Default: rated speed Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: S, T Section 6.3.4
Unit: r/min
Range: 0 ~ 10000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
In Speed mode, this parameter is used to set the maximum analog speed
command based on the maximum input voltage (10V).
In Torque mode, this parameter is used to set the maximum analog speed limit
based on the maximum input voltage (10V).
For example, in speed mode, if P1-40 is set to 3000 and the input voltage is 10V, it
indicates that the speed command is 3000 r/min. If P1-40 is set to 3000, but the
input voltage is changed to 5V, then the speed command is changed to 1500
r/min.
Speed Command / Limit = Input Voltage Value x Setting value of P1-40 / 10

7-32 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P1 - 41▲ TCM Max. Analog Torque Command or Limit Address: 0152H, 0153H

Default: 100 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.4.4
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
In Torque mode, this parameter is used to set the maximum analog torque
command based on the maximum input voltage (10V).
In PT and Speed mode, this parameter is used to set the maximum analog torque
limit based on the maximum input voltage (10V).
For example, in torque mode, if P1-41 is set to 100 and the input voltage is 10V, it
indicates that the torque command is 100% rated torque. If P1-41 is set to 100, but
the input voltage is changed to 5V, then the torque command is changed to 50%
rated torque.
Torque Command / Limit = Input Voltage Value x Setting value of P1-41 / 10

P1 - 42 MBT1 On Delay Time of Electromagnetic Brake Address: 0154H, 0155H

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.5.5
Unit: msec
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Used to set the period of time between when the servo drive is On (Servo On) and
when electromagnetic brake output signal (BRKR) is activated.

P1 - 43 MBT2 OFF Delay Time of Electromagnetic Brake Address: 0156H, 0157H

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.5.5
Unit: msec
Range: -1000 ~ +1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Used to set the period of time between when the servo drive is Off (Servo Off) and
when electromagnetic brake output signal (BRKR) is inactivated.

Revision June 2010 7-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Please note:
1. When servo is commanded off and the off delay time set by P1-43 has not
elapsed, if the motor speed is lower than the setting value of P1-38, the
electromagnetic brake will be engaged regardless of the off delay time set by
P1-43.
2. When servo is commanded off and the off delay time set by P1-43 has elapsed,
if the motor speed is higher than the setting value of P1-38, electromagnetic
brake will be engaged regardless of the current motor speed.
3. When the servo drive is disabled (Servo Off) due to a fault (except AL022) or by
EMGS (Emergency stop)) being activated, if the off delay time set by P1-43 is a
negative value, it will not affect the operation of the motor. A negative value of
the off delay time is equivalent to one with a zero value.

P1 - 44▲ GR1 Electronic Gear Ratio (1st Numerator) (N1) Address: 0158H, 0159H

Default: 16 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: PT Section 6.2.5
Unit: pulse
Range: 1 ~ (226-1)
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the numerator of the electronic gear ratio. The
denominator of the electronic gear ratio is set by P1-45. P2-60 ~ P2-62 are used to
set the additional numberators.
Please note:
1. In PT mode, the setting value of P1-44 can be changed only when the servo
drive is enabled (Servo On).

P1 - 45▲ GR2 Electronic Gear Ratio (Denominator) (M) Address: 015AH, 015BH

Default: 10 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: PT Section 6.3.6
Unit: pulse
Range: 1 ~ (231-1)
Data Size: 32-bit

7-34 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Display Format: Decimal

Settings:
This parameter is used to set the denominator of the electronic gear ratio. The
numerator of the electronic gear ratio is set by P1-44. P2-60 ~ P2-62 are used to
set the additional numberators.
As the wrong setting may cause motor to run chaotically (out of control) and it may
lead to personnel injury, therefore, ensure to observe the following rule when
setting P1-44, P1-45.
The electronic gear ratio setting (Please also see P1-44, P2-60 ~ P2-62):
Position f1: Pulse input f2: Position command
Pulse input N command
M N: Numerator, the setting value of P1-44 or
f1 N
f2 = f1 x M P2-60 ~ P2-62
M: Denominator, the setting value of P1-45
The electronic gear ratio setting range must be within: 1/50<N/M<25600.
Please note:
1. In PT r mode, the setting value of P1-45 can not be changed when the servo
drive is enabled (Servo On).

P1 - 46▲ GR3 Encoder Output Pulse Number Address: 015CH, 015DH

Default: 2500 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: pulse
Range: 20 ~ 40000
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the pulse numbers of encoder outputs per motor
revolution.
Please note:
When the following conditions occur, the output frequency for pulse output may
exceed the specification and cause that the servo drive fault AL018 (Encoder
Output Error) is activated.
Condition 1: Encoder error.
Condition 2: Motor speed is above the value set by parameter P1-76.

Revision June 2010 7-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P1 - 47 SPOK Speed Reached Output Range Address: 015EH, 015FH

Default: 10 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: S, Sz
Unit: r/min
Range: 0 ~ 300
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the speed reached output range. The DO signal,
SP_OK will be activated when the speed error is equal and below the setting value
of P1-47.

1. Speed Command: It is the speed command input by the users (no Accel/Decel),
not the frond-end command of speed control loop. The source of this command
includes analog voltage and registers.
2. Feedback Speed: It is the actual motor speed which is filtered.
3. Get Absolute Value
4. Judge if the speed error is equal and below the setting value of P1-47: When
P1-47 is set to 0, this digital output will be always off.
5. ON or OFF: When the speed error is equal and below the setting value of P1-47,
SP_OK will be ON; otherwise, SP_OK will be OFF.

P1 - 48 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 49 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 50 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 51 Reserved (Do Not Use)

7-36 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P1 - 52 RES1 Regenerative Resistor Value Address: 0168H, 0169H

Default: - Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.6.3
Unit: Ohm
Range: 10 ~ 750
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the resistance of the applicable regenerative resistor.
Model Default
For 750W models 100Ω
For 1kW to 3kW models 40Ω

P1 - 53 RES2 Regenerative Resistor Capacity Address: 016AH, 016BH

Default: - Related Section: Section 6.6.3

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: Watt
Range: 30 ~ 3000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the capacity of the applicable regenerative resistor.
Model Default
For 750W models 60W
For 1kW to 3kW models 60W

P1 - 54 PER Positioning Completed Width Address: 016CH, 016DH

Default: 1600 Related Section: Table 7.B

Applicable Control Mode: PT
Unit: pulse
Range: 0 ~ 1280000
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
In PT mode, when the error pulse numbers is less than the setting value of
parameter P1-54, TPOS (At positioning completed signal) will be activated.

Revision June 2010 7-37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P1 - 55 MSPD Maximum Speed Limit Address: 016EH, 016FH

Default: rated speed Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: r/min
Range: 0 ~ Max. speed
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set maximum motor speed. The default setting is rated
speed.

P1 - 56 OVW Output Overload Warning Time Address: 0170H, 0171H

Default: 120 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 120
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set output overload time. If the setting value of
parameter P1-56 is set to 0 ~ 100, the function of parameter P1-56 is enabled.
When the motor has reached the output overload time set by parameter P1-56, the
motor will send a warning to the drive. After the drive has detected the warning,
the DO signal OLW will be activated. If the setting value of parameter P1-56
exceeds 100, the function of parameter P1-56 is disabled.

tOL = Permissible Time for Overload x the setting value of parameter P1-56
When overload accumulated time (continuously overload time) exceeds the value
of tOL, the overload warning signal will output, i.e. DO signal, OLW will be ON.
However, if the accumulated overload time (continuous overload time) exceeds the
permissible time for overload, the overload alarm (AL006) will occur.

For example:
If the setting value of parameter P1-56 (Output Overload Warning Time) is 60%,
when the permissible time for overload exceeds 8 seconds at 200% rated output,
the overload fault (AL006) will be detected and shown on the LED display.
At this time, tOL = 8 x 60% = 4.8 seconds

Result:
When the drive output is at 200% rated output and the drive is continuously
overloaded for 4.8 seconds, the overload warning signal will be ON, i.e. DO
signal OLW will be activated. If the drive is continuously overloaded for 8 seconds,

7-38 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

the overload alarm will be detected and shown on the LED display (AL006). Then,
Servo Fault signal will be ON (DO signal ALRM will be activated).

P1 - 57 CRSHA Motor Protection Percentage Address: 0172H, 0173H

Default: 0 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 300
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to protect the motor in case the motor touchs the
mechanical equipment. If P1-57 is set to 0, the function of P1-57 is disabled. The
function of P1-57 is enabled when the setting value of P1-57 is set to 1 or more.
The fault AL030 will be activated when the setting value of P1-57 is reached after a
period of time set by P1-58.

P1 - 58 CRSHT Motor Protection Time Address: 0174H, 0175H

Default: 1 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: msec
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to protect the motor in case the motor touchs the
mechanical equipment. The fault AL030 will be activated when the setting value
of P1-57 is reached after a period of time set by P1-58.
Please note that this function is applicable for non-contact applications, such as
electric discharge machines only (P1-37 must be set correctly).

P1 - 59 MFLT Analog Speed Linear Filter (Moving Filter) Address: 0176H, 0177H

Default: 0 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: S
Unit: 0.1msec
Range: 0 ~ 40 (0: Disabled)
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:

Revision June 2010 7-39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

This parameter is used to eliminate the noise generated during the operation
when the host (external) controller sends the step analog voltage speed command.
The parameter P1-06 is Low-pass Filter and parameter P1-59 is Moving Filter. The
differences are that Low-pass Filter is usually used to smooth the end of the
command but Moving Filter can be used to smooth the start and the end of step
analog voltage speed command. Using Moving Filter can facilitate the smooth
operation of the motor very effectively.
Therefore, it is recommended to use P1-06 Low-pass Filter when the speed
command from the external controller is applied for position control loop. If the
command is for speed control only, using Moving Filter P1-59 can achieve better
(smooth) performance.

P1 - 60 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 61 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 62 FRCL Friction Compensation Percentage Address: 017CH, 017DH

Default: 0 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: PT, S
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the torque percentage for friction compensation. If
P1-62 is set to 0, the function of P1-62 is disabled. The function of P1-62 is
enabled when the setting value of P1-62 is set to 1 or more.

7-40 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P1 - 63 FRCT Friction Compensation Smooth Constant Address: 017EH, 017FH

Default: 0 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: msec
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the smooth constant of friction compensation.

P1 - 64 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 65 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 66 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 67 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 68 PFLT2 Position Command Moving Filter Address: 0188H, 0189H

Default: 4 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: PT
Unit: msec
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal

P1 - 69 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 70 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 71 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 72 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 73 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 74 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P1 - 75 Reserved (Do Not Use)

Revision June 2010 7-41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P1 - 76 AMSPD Max. Rotation Speed of Encoder Output Address: 0198H, 0199H

Default: 5500 Related Section: P1-46

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: r/min
Range: 0 ~ 6000 (0: Disabled)
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to optimize the encoder outputs (OA, OB). When the users
set the actual reached maximum motor speed, the servo drive will equalize the
encoder outputs automatically. When P1-76 is set to 0, it indicates that equalizing
function is not available.

7-42 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Group 2: P2-xx Extension Parameters

P2 - 00 KPP Proportional Position Loop Gain Address: 0200H, 0201H

Default: 35 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: PT Section 6.2.8
Unit: rad/s
Range: 0 ~ 2047
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the position loop gain. It can increase stiffness,
expedite position loop response and reduce position error. However, if the setting
value is over high, it may generate vibration or noise.

P2 - 01 PPR Position Loop Gain Switching Rate Address: 0202H, 0203H

Default: 100 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: PT Section 6.2.8
Unit: %
Range: 10 ~ 500
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the position gain switching rate when the gain
switching condition is satisfied. Please refer to P2-27 for gain switching control
selection settings and refer to P2-29 for gain switching condition settings.

P2 - 02 PFG Position Feed Forward Gain Address: 0204H, 0205H

Default: 50 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: PT Section 6.2.8
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the feed forward gain when executing position
control command. When using position smooth command, increase gain can
improve position track deviation. When not using position smooth command,
decrease gain can improve the resonance condition of mechanical system.

Revision June 2010 7-43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Smooth Constant of Position Feed

P2 - 03 PFF Address: 0206H, 0207H
Forward Gain

Default: 5 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: PT
Unit: msec
Range: 2 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
When using position smooth command, increase gain can improve position track
deviation. When not using position smooth command, decrease gain can improve
the resonance condition of mechanical system.

P2 - 04 KVP Proportional Speed Loop Gain Address: 0208H, 0209H

Default: 500 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.3.6
Unit: rad/s
Range: 0 ~ 8191
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the speed loop gain. When the value of proportional
speed loop gain is increased, it can expedite speed loop response. However, if the
setting value is over high, it may generate vibration or noise.

P2 - 05 SPR Speed Loop Gain Switching Rate Address: 020AH, 020BH

Default: 100 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: %
Range: 10 ~ 500
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the speed gain switching rate when the gain
switching condition is satisfied. Please refer to P2-27 for gain switching control
selection settings and refer to P2-29 for gain switching condition settings.

7-44 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P2 - 06 KVI Speed Integral Compensation Address: 020CH, 020DH

Default: 100 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.3.6
Unit: rad/s
Range: 0 ~ 1023
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the integral time of speed loop. When the value of
speed integral compensation is increased, it can improve the speed response
ability and decrease the speed control deviation. However, if the setting value is
over high, it may generate vibration or noise.

P2 - 07 KVF Speed Feed Forward Gain Address: 020EH, 020FH

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.3.6
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the feed forward gain when executing speed control
command.
When using speed smooth command, increase gain can improve speed track
deviation.
When not using speed smooth command, decrease gain can improve the
resonance condition of mechanical system.

P2 - 08■ PCTL Special Factory Setting Address: 0210H, 0211H

Default: 0 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 65535
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter can be used to reset all parameters to their original factory
settings and enable some parameters functions.
Reset parameters settings:

Revision June 2010 7-45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

10: Users can reset all parameter values to factory defaults. All parameter values
will be reset after re-power the servo drive. (Before perform this settings, ensure
that the status of the servo drive is “Servo Off”.)
Enable parameters functions:
20: If P2-08 is set to 20, then the parameter P4-10 is enabled.
22: If P2-08 is set to 22, then the parameters P4-11~P4-19 are enabled.
406: If P2-08 is set to 406, then the Digital Output (DO) signal can be forced to be
activated and the drive will enter into Force Output Control operation mode.
400: If P2-08 is set to 400, it can switch the Force Output Control operation mode
to normal Digital Output (DO) Control operation mode.

P2 - 09 DRT Bounce Filter Address: 0212H, 0213H

Default: 2 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: 2msec
Range: 0 ~ 20
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
For example, if P2-09 is set to 5, the bounce filter time is 5 x 2msec = 10msec.
When there are too much vibration or noises around environment, increasing this
setting value (bounce filter time) can improve reliability. However, if the time is too
long, it may affect the response time.

P2 - 10 DI1 Digital Input Terminal 1 (DI1) Address: 0214H, 0215H

Default: 101 Related Section: Table 7.A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 015Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
The parameters from P2-10 to P2-17 and P2-36 are used to determine the
functions and statuses of DI1 ~ DI8.

7-46 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

A: DI (Digital Input) Function Settings:

For the setting value of P2- 10 ~ P2-17 and P2-36, please refer to Table 7.A.
B: DI (Digital Input) Enabled Status Settings:
0: Normally closed (contact b)
1: Normally open (contact a)
For example, when P2-10 is set to 101, it indicates that the function of DI1 is SON
(Servo On, setting value is 0x01) and it requires a normally open contact to be
connected to it.
Please re-start the servo drive after parameters have been changed.
Please note:
The parameter P3-06 is used to set how the Digital Inputs (DI) accept commands
and signals through the external terminals or via the communication which is
determined by parameter P4-07.

P2 - 11 DI2 Digital Input Terminal 2 (DI2) Address: 0216H, 0217H

Default: 104 Related Section: Table 7.A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 015Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Refer to P2-10 for explanation.

P2 - 12 DI3 Digital Input Terminal 3 (DI3) Address: 0218H, 0219H

Default: 116 Related Section: Table 7.A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 015Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Refer to P2-10 for explanation.

P2 - 13 DI4 Digital Input Terminal 4 (DI4) Address: 021AH, 021BH

Default: 117 Related Section: Table 7.A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 015Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal

Revision June 2010 7-47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Settings: Refer to P2-10 for explanation.

P2 - 14 DI5 Digital Input Terminal 5 (DI5) Address: 021CH, 021DH

Default: 102 Related Section: Table 7.A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 015Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Refer to P2-10 for explanation.

P2 - 15 DI6 Digital Input Terminal 6 (DI6) Address: 021EH, 021FH

Default: 22 Related Section: Table 7.A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 015Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Refer to P2-10 for explanation.

P2 - 16 DI7 Digital Input Terminal 7 (DI7) Address: 0220H, 0221H

Default: 23 Related Section: Table 7.A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 015Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Refer to P2-10 for explanation.

P2 - 17 DI8 Digital Input Terminal 8 (DI8) Address: 0222H, 0223H

Default: 21 Related Section: Table 7.A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 015Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Refer to P2-10 for explanation.

7-48 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P2 - 18 DO1 Digital Output Terminal 1 (DO1) Address: 0224H, 0225H

Default: 101 Related Section: Table 7.B

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 013Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
The parameters from P2-18 to P2-22 and P2-37 are used to determine the
functions and statuses of DO1 ~ DO5.

A: DO Function Settings:
For the setting value of P2- 18 ~ P2-22 and P2-37, please refer to Table 7.B.
B: DO Enabled Status Settings:
0: Normally closed (contact b)
1: Normally open (contact a)
For example, when P2-18 is set to 101, it indicates that the function of DO1 is
SRDY (Servo ready, setting value is 0x01) and it requires a normally open contact
to be connected to it.
Please re-start the servo drive after parameters have been changed.

P2 - 19 DO2 Digital Output Terminal 2 (DO2) Address: 0226H, 0227H

Default: 103 Related Section: Table 7.B

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 013Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Refer to P2-18 for explanation.

P2 - 20 DO3 Digital Output Terminal 3 (DO3) Address: 0228H, 0229H

Default: 109 Related Section: Table 7.B

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 013Fh

Revision June 2010 7-49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Data Size: 16-bit

Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Refer to P2-18 for explanation.

P2 - 21 DO4 Digital Output Terminal 4 (DO4) Address: 022AH, 022BH

Default: 105 Related Section: Table 7.B

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 013Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Refer to P2-18 for explanation.

P2 - 22 DO5 Digital Output Terminal 5 (DO5) Address: 022CH, 022DH

Default: 7 Related Section: Table 7.B

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 013Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Refer to P2-18 for explanation.

P2 - 23 NCF1 Notch Filter 1 (Resonance Suppression) Address: 022EH, 022FH

Default: 1000 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.3.7
Unit: Hz
Range: 50 ~ 2000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set first resonance frequency of mechanical system. It
can be used to suppress the resonance of mechanical system and reduce the
vibration of mechanical system.
If P2-24 is set to 0, this parameter is disabled.
The parameters P2-23 and P2-24 are the first group of notch filter parameters and
the parameters P2-43 and P2-44 are the second group of notch filter parameters.

7-50 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Notch Filter Attenuation Rate 1

P2 - 24 DPH1 Address: 0230H, 0231H
(Resonance Suppression)

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.3.7
Unit: dB
Range: 0 ~ 32
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set magnitude of the resonance suppression that is set
by parameter P2-23. If P2-24 is set to 0, the parameters P2-23 and P2-24 are both
disabled.
The parameters P2-23 and P2-24 are the first group of notch filter parameters and
the parameters P2-43 and P2-44 are the second group of notch filter parameters.

Low-pass Filter Time Constant

P2 - 25 NLP Address: 0232H, 0233H
(Resonance Suppression)

Default: 2 (1kW and below models) or Related Section:

5 (other models) Section 6.3.7
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: 0.1 msec
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set low-pass filter time constant of resonance
suppression.
If P2-25 is set to 0, this parameter is disabled.

P2 - 26 DST External Anti-Interference Gain Address: 0234H, 0235H

Default: 0 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: 0.001
Range: 0 ~ 1023
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
If P2-26 is set to 0, this parameter is disabled.

Revision June 2010 7-51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P2 - 27 GCC Gain Switching Control Selection Address: 0236H, 0237H

Default: 0 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 4
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
Gain Switching Condition Settings:

A: Gain Switching Condition Settings:

0: Disabled
1: Gain switching DI (Digital Input) signal (GAINUP) is On. (see Table 8.A)
2: In position mode, position deviation is higher than the setting value of P2-29.
3: Position command frequency is higher than the setting value of P2-29.
4: Servo motor speed is higher than the setting value of P2-29.
5: Gain switching DI (Digital Input) signal (GAINUP) is Off. (see Table 8.A)
6: In position mode, position deviation is lower than the setting value of P2-29.
7: Position command frequency is lower than the setting value of P2-29.
8: Servo motor speed is lower than the setting value of P2-29.
B: Gain Switching Control Settings:
0: Gain multiple switching
1: P Æ PI switching

Setting P mode S mode Status

P2-00 x 100%
P2-04 x 100% Before switching
P2-04 x 100%
0
P2-00 x P2-01
P2-04 x P2-05 After switching
P2-04 x P2-05
P2-06 x 0%
Before switching
P2-26 x 0%
1
P2-06 x 100%
After switching
P2-26 x 100%

7-52 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P2 - 28 GUT Gain Switching Time Constant Address: 0238H, 0239H

Default: 10 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: 10msec
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the time constant when switching the smooth gain.

P2 - 29 GPE Gain Switching Condition Address: 023AH, 023BH

Default: 160000 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: pulse, Kpps, r/min
Range: 0 ~ 3840000
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the value of gain switching condition (pulse error,
Kpps, r/min) selected in P2-27. The setting value will be different depending on
the different gain switching condition.

P2 - 30■ INH Auxiliary Function Address: 023CH, 023DH

Default: 0 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: -8 ~ +8
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
0: Disabled all functions described below.
1: Force the servo drive to be Servo On (upon software)
2: Reserved
3: Reserved
4: Reserved
5: After setting P2-30 to 5, the setting values of all parameters will lost (not remain
in memory) at power-down. When the parameters data are no more needed, using
this mode can allows users not to save parameters data into memory without

Revision June 2010 7-53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

damaging the EEPROM. P2-30 should be set to 5 when using communication

control function.
6: After setting P2-30 to 6, the servo drive will enter into Simulation mode. At this
time, DO signal SRDY (Servo ready) will be activated. The servo drive can accept
commands in each mode and monitor the commands via Data Scope function
provided by ASDA-Soft software program. But, the servo motor will not run when
the servo drvie in Simulation mode. This setting is only used to check and ensure
the command is correct. It indicates the external Servo On signal is disabled in this
mode, and therefore the motor fault messages such as overcurrent, overload, or
overspeed, etc. will not display. The paraemeter P0-01 displays external fault
messages such as reverse inhibit limit, forward inhibit limit, or emergency stop,
etc. only.
Please note:
1. Please set P2-30 to 0 during normal operation.
2. When the communication control function is used, ensure that P2-30 is set to
5.
3. The setting value of P2-30 will return to 0 automatically after re-power the
servo drive.

Speed Frequency Response Level in Auto

P2 - 31 AUT1 Address: 023EH, 023FH
and Semi-Auto Mode

Default: 80 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 5.6, Section 6.3.6
Unit: Hz
Range: 1 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter allows the users to set the speed frequency response level of
auto-tuning and semi-auto tuning mode. The speed frequency response settings
are as follows:
1 ~ 50Hz : Low stiffness and low frequency response
51 ~ 250Hz : Medium stiffness and medium frequency response
251 ~ 550Hz : High stiffness and high frequency response
Please note:
1. The servo drive will set the position frequency response according to the
setting value of P2-31.
2. This parameter is activated by P2-32. Please refer to Section 5.6 for the tuning
procedure and the related settings.

7-54 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P2 - 32▲ AUT2 Tuning Mode Selection Address: 0240H, 0241H

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 5.6, Section 6.3.6
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 2
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
0: Manual mode
1: Auto Mode [Continuous adjustment]
2: Semi-Auto Mode [Non-continuous adjustment]
Explanation of manual mode:
1. When P2-32 is set to mode#0, the setting value of P2-00, P2-02, P2-04, P2-06,
P2-07, P2-25 and P2-26 can be user-defined. When switching mode #1 or #2 to
#0, the setting value of P2-00, P2-02, P2-04, P2-06, P2-07, P2-25 and P2-26 will
change to the value that measured in #1 auto-tuning mode or #2 semi-auto
tuning mode.
Explanation of auto-tuning mode:
The servo drive will continuously estimate the system inertia, save the measured
load inertia value automatically and memorized in P1-37 every 30 minutes by
referring to the frequency response settings of P2-31.
1. When switching mode #1 or #2 to #0, the servo drive will continuously
estimate the system inertia, save the measured load inertia value automatically
and memorized in P1-37. Then, set the corresponding parameters according to
this measured load inertia value.
2. When switching mode#0 or #1 to #2, enter the appropriate load inertia value in
P1-37.
3. When switching mode#1 to #0, the setting value of P2-00, P2-04 and P2-06 will
change to the value that measured in #1 auto-tuning mode.
Explanation of semi-auto tuning mode:
1. When switching mode #2 to #0, the setting value of P2-00, P2-04, P2-06, P2-25
and P2-26 will change to the value that measured in #1 auto-tuning mode.
2. After the system inertia becomes stable (The displau of P2-33 will show 1), it
will stop estimating the system inertia, save the measured load inertia value
automatically, and memorized in P1-37. However, when P2-32 is set to
mode#1 or #2, the servo drive will continuously perform the adjustment for a
period of time.
3. When the value of the system inertia becomes over high, the display of P2-33
will show 0 and the servo drive will start to adjust the load inertia value
continuously.

Revision June 2010 7-55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Semi-Auto Mode Inertia Adjustment

P2 - 33▲ AUT3 Address: 0242H, 0243H
Selection

Default: 0 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 1
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:

When the setting value of A is set to 0 or display is 0, it indicates that the load
inertia estimation of semi-auto tuning mode has been executed but not been
completed yet.
When the setting value of A is set to 1, it indicates that the load inertia estimation
of semi-auto tuning mode has been completed. The measured load inertia is
memorized in P1-37. If P2-33 is reset to 0, the servo drive will perform continuous
adjustment for estimating the load inertia (P1-37) again.
B: Reserved.

P2 - 34 SDEV Overspeed Warning Condition Address: 0244H, 0245H

Default: 5000 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: S
Unit: r/min
Range: 1 ~ 6000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the over speed threshold that is used to determine
the over speed fault condition. When the difference in speed between the desired
speed and actual motor speed is over than the setting value of parameter P2-34,
the servo fault, Overspeed (AL007) will be activated.

7-56 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P2 - 35 PDEV Excessive Error Warning Condition Address: 0246H, 0247H

Default: 480000 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: PT
Unit: pulse
Range: 1 ~ 16000000
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the position deviation excessive error threshold that
is used to determine the escessive deviation fault condition. When the difference
in pulse number between the desired position and actual motor position is over
than the setting value of parameter P2-35, the servo fault, Excessive Deviation
(AL009) will be activated.

P2 - 36 DI9 External Digital Input Terminal 9 (DI9) Address: 0248H, 0249H

Default: 0 Related Section: Table 7.A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 015Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
The parameters from P2-36 to P2-41 are used to determine the functions and
statuses of external DI9 ~ DI14.

A: DI (Digital Input) Function Settings:

For the setting value of P2- 36 ~ P2-41, please refer to Table 7.A.
B: External DI (Digital Input) Enabled Status Settings:
0: Normally closed (contact b)
1: Normally open (contact a)

Revision June 2010 7-57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P2 - 37 DO6 Digital Output Terminal 6 (DO6) Address: 024AH, 024BH

Default: 7 Related Section: Table 7.B

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 013Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Refer to P2-18 for explanation.

P2 - 38 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P2 - 39 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P2 - 40 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P2 - 41 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P2 - 42 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P2 - 43 NCF2 Notch Filter 2 (Resonance Suppression) Address: 0256H, 0257H

Default: 1000 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.3.7
Unit: Hz
Range: 50 ~ 2000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set second resonance frequency of mechanical system.
It can be used to suppress the resonance of mechanical system and reduce the
vibration of mechanical system.
If P2-43 is set to 0, this parameter is disabled.
The parameters P2-23 and P2-24 are the first group of notch filter parameters and
the parameters P2-43 and P2-44 are the second group of notch filter parameters.

Notch Filter Attenuation Rate 2

P2 - 44 DPH2 Address: 0258H, 0259H
(Resonance Suppression)

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.3.7
Unit: dB
Range: 0 ~ 32
Data Size: 16-bit

7-58 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Display Format: Decimal

Settings:
This parameter is used to set magnitude of the resonance suppression that is set
by parameter P2-43. If P2-44 is set to 0, the parameters P2-43 and P2-44 are both
disabled.

P2 - 45 NCF3 Notch Filter 3 (Resonance Suppression) Address: 025AH, 025BH

Default: 1000 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.3.7
Unit: Hz
Range: 50 ~ 2000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set third resonance frequency of mechanical system. It
can be used to suppress the resonance of mechanical system and reduce the
vibration of mechanical system.
If P2-45 is set to 0, this parameter is disabled.

Notch Filter Attenuation Rate 3

P2 - 46 DPH3 Address: 025CH, 025DH
(Resonance Suppression)

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.3.7
Unit: dB
Range: 0 ~ 32
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set magnitude of the resonance suppression that is set
by parameter P2-45. If P2-46 is set to 0, the parameters P2-45 and P2-46 are both
disabled.

Auto Resonance Suppression Mode

P2 - 47 ANCF Address: 025EH, 025FH
Selection

Default: 1 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 2
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal

Revision June 2010 7-59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Settings:
0: Disable Auto Resonance Suppression Mode.
The setting value of P2-23~P2-24 and P2-43~P2-46 will be fixed and will not be
changed.
1: Auto Resonance Suppression Mode 1 [Non-continuous adjustment]
After the resonance is suppressed, the setting value of P2-23, P2-24, P2-43,
P2-44, P2-45 and P2-46 will be fixed and will not be changed.
2: Auto Resonance Suppression Mode 2 [Continuous adjustment]
The servo drive will perform the resonance suppression continuously (will not
stop). The setting value of P2-23, P2-24, P2-43, P2-44, P2-45 and P2-46 will not
be fixed.
When P2-47 is set to 1, the resonance suppression will be enabled automatically.
After the mechanical system becomes stable, the setting value of P2-47 will return
to 0. When the mechanical system is stable, the resonance suppression point will
be memorized. When the mechanical system is not stable, if the servo drive is
restarted or P2-47 is set to 1, the servo drive will estimate the resonance
suppression point again.
When P2-47 is set to 2, the servo drive will perform the resonance suppression
continuously. When the mechanical system becomes stable, the resonance
suppression point will be memorized. When the mechanical system is not stable, if
the servo drive is restarted, the servo drive will estimate the resonance
suppression point again.
When switching the mode#1 or #2 to #0, the setting values of P2-43, P2-44, P2-45
and P2-46 will be saved automatically.

Auto Resonance Suppression Detection

P2 - 48 ANCL Address: 0260H, 0261H
Level

Default: 100 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 1 ~ 300%
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
When the setting value is smaller, the system will become more sensitive to detect
and find the resonance.
When the value of ↑
The setting value of P2-48 ↑, the sensitivity of detecting resonance ↓.
The setting value of P2-48 ↓, the sensitivity of detecting resonance ↑.

7-60 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Speed Detection Filter and Jitter

P2 - 49 SJIT Address: 0262H, 0263H
Suppression

Default: 0 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: sec
Range: 0 ~ 1F
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Setting Value of P2-49 Cutoff Frequency of Speed Loop Feedback (Hz)
00 2500
01 2250
02 2100
03 2000
04 1800
05 1600
06 1500
07 1400
08 1300
09 1200
0A 1100
0B 1000
0C 950
0D 900
0E 850
0F 800
10 750
11 700
12 650
13 600
14 550
15 500
16 450
17 400
18 350
19 300
1A 250
1B 200
1C 175
1D 150
1E 125
1F 100

Revision June 2010 7-61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P2 - 50 DCLR Pulse Deviation Clear Mode Address: 0264H, 0265H

Default: 0 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: PT
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 2
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
For digital input function (DI function), please refer to Table 7.A.
This pulse deviation clear function is enabled when a digital input is set to pulse
clear function (CCLR mode, DI (Digital Input) setting value is 0x04). When this
input is triggered, the position accumulated pulse number will be clear to 0.
(available in PT mode only)
0: CCLR is triggered by rising-edge
1: CCLR is triggered bu level

P2 - 51 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P2 - 52 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P2 - 53 KPI Position Integral Compensation Address: 026AH, 026BH

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.3.6
Unit: rad/s
Range: 0 ~ 1023
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the integral time of position loop. When the value of
position integral compensation is increased, it can decrease the position control
deviation. However, if the setting value is over high, it may generate position
overshoot or noise.

P2 - 54 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P2 - 55 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P2 - 56 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P2 - 57 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P2 - 58 Reserved (Do Not Use)

7-62 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P2 - 59 Reserved (Do Not Use)

Electronic Gear Ratio (2nd Numerator)

P2 - 60 GR4 Address: 0278H, 0279H
(N2)

Default: 16 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: PT
Unit: pulse
Range: 1 ~ (226-1)
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
The electronic gear numerator value can be set via GNUM0, GNUM1 (refer to Table
8.A).
When the GNUM0, GNUM1 are not defined, the default of gear numerator value is
set by P1-44.
When the users wish to set the gear numerator value by using GNUM0, GNUM1,
please set P2-60 ~ P2-62 after the servo motor has been stopped to prevent the
mechanical system vibration.

Electronic Gear Ratio (3rd Numerator)

P2 - 61 GR5 Address: 027AH, 027BH
(N3)

Default: 16 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: PT
Unit: pulse
Range: 1 ~ (226-1)
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Refer to P2-60 for explanation.

Revision June 2010 7-63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P2 - 62 GR6 Electronic Gear Ratio (4th Numerator) (N4) Address: 027CH, 027DH

Default: 16 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: PT
Unit: pulse
Range: 1 ~ (226-1)
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Refer to P2-60 for explanation.

P2 - 63 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P2 - 64 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P2 - 65 GBIT Special Function 1 Address: 0282H, 0283H

Default: 0 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: PT, S
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 0xFF
Data Size: N/A
Display Format: N/A
Settings:
Bit15 Bit14 Bit13 Bit12 Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bit8 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0

Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2

Bit2 ~ Bit5: Reserved. Must be set to 0.

Bit6
Bit6: Abnormal pulse command detection
0: enable abnormal pulse command detection
1: disable abnormal pulse command detection

Bit8
Bit8: U, V, W wiring error detection
1: enable U, V, W wiring error detection

Bit9
Bit9: U, V, W wiring cut-off detection
1: enable U, V, W wiring cut-off detection

7-64 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Bit10
Bit10: DI ZCLAMP function selection
When the following conditions are all met, ZCLAMP function will be activated.
Condition1: Speed mode
Condition2: DI ZCLAMP is activated.
Condition3: External analog speed command or internal registers speed
command is less than parameter P1-38.
0: When the command source is an analog speed command, the users can use
ZCLAMP DI signal to stop the motor at the desire position and do not care the
acceleration and deceleration speed curve of the analog speed command. The
motor will be locked at the position when ZCLAMP conditions are satisfied.

0: When the command source is an internal speed command, the users can use
ZCLAMP DI signal to stop the motor at the desire position and keep the the
acceleration and deceleration speed curve of the internal speed command. The
motor will be locked at the position when ZCLAMP conditions are satisfied.

1: When the command source is an analog speed command, the users can use
ZCLAMP DI signal to stop the motor at the desire position and do not care the
acceleration and deceleration speed curve of the internal speed command.
When ZCLAMP conditions are satisfied, the speed command is decreased to 0
r/min. When ZCLAMP conditions are not satisfied, the speed command will
follow the analog speed command through Accel/Decel S-curve.

Revision June 2010 7-65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

1: When the command source is an internal speed command, the users can use
ZCLAMP DI signal to stop the motor at the desire position and keep the
acceleration and deceleration speed curve of the analog speed command.
When ZCLAMP conditions are satisfied, the speed command is forced to 0
r/min directly.

B11
Bit11: NL(CWL)/PL(CCWL) pulse input inhibit function
0: Disable NL(CWL)/PL(CCWL) pulse input inhibit function. In PT mode, no matter
NL or PL exists or not, external position pulse command will be input into the
servo drive.
1: Enable NL(CWL)/PL(CCWL) pulse input inhibit function. In PT mode, if NL exists,
the external NL pulse input into the servo drive will be inhibited and PL pulse
input will be accepted. On the one hand, in PT mode, if PL exists, the external
PL pulse input into the servo drive will be inhibited and PL pulse input will be
accepted.
Please note:
If NL and PL both exist, NL and PL pulse input into the servo drive will be both
inhibited.

7-66 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Bit12
Bit12: Input power phase loss detection function
0: Enable Input power phase loss (AL022) detection function
1: Disable Input power phase loss (AL022) detection function

Bit13
Bit13: Encoder output error detection function
0: Enable encoder output error (AL018) detection function
1: Disable encoder output error (AL018) detection function

Bit15 Bit14
Bit14 ~ Bit15: Reserved. Must be set to 0.

P2 - 66 GBIT2 Special Function 2 Address: 0284H, 0285H

Default: 0 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: PT, S
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 0x000F
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0

Bit1 Bit0
Bit0 ~ Bit1: Reserved. Must be set to 0.

Bit2
Bit2: Undervoltage (Servo Drive Fault) clear mode selection
0: The fault, Undervoltage will not be cleared automatically.
1: The fault, Undervoltage will be cleared automatically.

Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3

Bit3 ~ Bit7: Reserved. Must be set to 0.

Revision June 2010 7-67

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P2 - 67 JSL Stable Inertia Estimating Time Address: 0286H, 0287H

Default: 1.5 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: 0.1times
Range: 0 ~ 200.0
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
In semi-auto tuning mode, after the servo drive continuously perform the
adjustment for a period of time which is determined by P2-67, the system will
consider that the system inertia has become stable and finish the operation of
system inertia estimation.

7-68 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Group 3: P3-xx Communication Parameters

P3 - 00 ADR Communication Address Setting Address: 0300H, 0301H

Default: 0x7F Related Section: Section 8.2

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0x01 ~ 0x7F
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the communication slave address in hexadecimal
format. This address is an absolute address which represents the servo drive on a
RS-232/485 or CANbus network.
Display 0 0 Y X
Range - - 0~7 0~F

X: Axis number, the value must be within the range from 0 through F.
Y: Group number, the value must be within the range from 0 to through 7
If the AC servo drive is controlled by RS-232/485 communication, each drive (or
device) must be uniquely identified. One servo drive only can set one address. If
the address is duplicated, there will be a communication fault.
Please note:
1. This parameter does not provide broadcast function and does not respond
insecurity.
2. When the address of host (external) controller is set to 0xFF, it is with
auto-respond function. Then, the servo drive will receive from and respond to
host (external) controller both no matter the address is matching or not.
However, the parameter P3-00 cannot be set to 0xFF.

P3 - 01 BRT Transmission Speed Address: 0302H, 0303H

Default: 0x0203 Related Section: Section 8.2

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: bps
Range: 0x0000 ~ 0x0055
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the baud rate and data transmission speed of the
communications.

Revision June 2010 7-69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Display 0 Z Y X
COM Port - - RS-485 RS-232
Range 0 0 0~5 0~5

X: Baud rate setting

0: Baud rate 4800
1: Baud rate 9600
2: Baud rate 19200
3: Baud rate 38400
4: Baud rate 57600
5: Baud rate 115200

P3 - 02 PTL Communication Protocol Address: 0304H, 0305H

Default: 0x0066 Related Section: Section 8.2

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0x0000 ~ 0x0088
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the communication protocol. The alphanumeric
characters represent the following: 7 or 8 is the number of data bits; N, E or O
refers to the parity bit, Non, Even or Odd; the 1 or 2 is the numbers of stop bits.
0: Modbus ASCII mode, <7,N,2>
1: Modbus ASCII mode, <7,E,1 >
2: Modbus ASCII mode, <7,O,1>
3: Modbus ASCII mode, <8,N,2 >
4: Modbus ASCII mode, <8,E,1>
5: Modbus ASCII mode, <8,O,1>
6: Modbus RTU mode, <8,N,2>
7: Modbus RTU mode, <8,E,1>
8: Modbus RTU mode, <8,O,1>

P3 - 03 FLT Transmission Fault Treatment Address: 0306H, 0307H

Default: 0 Related Section: Section 8.2

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 1
Data Size: 16-bit

7-70 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Display Format: Hexadecimal

Settings:
0: Display fault and continue operating
1: Display fault and decelerate to stop operating
This parameter is used to determine the operating sequence once a
communication fault has been detected. If '1' is selected, the drive will stop
operating upon detection the communication fault. The mode of stopping is set by
parameter P1-32.

P3 - 04 CWD Communication Time Out Detection Address: 0308H, 0309H

Default: 0 Related Section: Section 8.2

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: sec
Range: 0 ~ 20
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the maximum permissible time before detecting a
fault due to communication time out. When P3-04 is set to a value over than 0, it
indicates this parameter is enabled. However, if not communicating with the servo
in this period of time, the servo drive will assume the communication has failed
and show the communication error fault message.
When P3-04 is set to 0, this parameter is disabled.

P3 - 05 CMM Communication Selection Address: 030AH, 030BH

Default: 1 Related Section: Section 8.2

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0x00 ~ 0x01
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
Communication interface selection
0: RS-232 via Modbus communication
1: RS-232 upon ASDA-Soft software

Revision June 2010 7-71

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P3 - 06■ SDI Digital Input Communication Function Address: 030CH, 030DH

Default: 0 Related Section: Section 8.2

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0x0000 ~ 0x1FFF
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
The setting of this parameter determines how the Digital Inputs (DI) accept
commands and signals.
Bit0 ~ Bit 8 corresponds with DI1 ~ DI9. The least significant bit (Bit0) shows DI1
status and the most significant bit (Bit7) shows DI8 status.
Bit settings:
0: Digital input is controlled by external command (via CN1)
1: Digital input is controlled by parameter P4-07
For the settings of DI1 ~ DI9, please refer to P2-10 ~ P2-17 and P2-36.
This parameter P3-06 also works in conjunction with the parameter P4-07 which
has several functions. Please see section 8.2 for details.

P3 - 07 CDT Communication Response Delay Time Address: 030EH, 030FH

Default: 0 Related Section: Section 8.2

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: 1msec
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to delay the communication time that servo drive responds
to host controller (external controller).

P3 - 08■ MNS Monitor Mode Address: 0310H, 0311H

Default: 0000 Related Section: Section 8.2

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: refer to the description of Settings
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to monitor the data of the servo drive via communication.

7-72 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

The monitor data can be displayed on PC upon the data scope function provided
by ASDA-Soft software.
Byte - - Low High
Function - - Monitor mode
Range 0 0 0 0~3

H: Monitor mode, the value must be within the range from 0 through 3.
0: Disabled, i.e. disable monitor function.
1: Reserved.
2: High-speed monitor mode. The sampling time is 2000 times per second and 4
channels can be monitored.
3: High-speed monitor mode. The sampling time is 4000 times per second and 2
channels can be monitored.

P3 - 09 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P3 - 10 Reserved (Do Not Use)

P3 - 11 Reserved (Do Not Use)

Revision June 2010 7-73

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Group 4: P4-xx Diagnosis Parameters

P4 - 00★ ASH1 Fault Record (N) Address: 0400H, 0401H

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 4.4.1
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the most recent fault record.
Display of Low Byte: LXXXX: It indicates the fault code, i.e. alarm code
Display of High Byte: hYYYY: Reserved.

P4 - 01★ ASH2 Fault Record (N-1) Address: 0402H, 0403H

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 4.4.1
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the second most recent fault record.

P4 - 02★ ASH3 Fault Record (N-2) Address: 0404H, 0405H

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 4.4.1
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the third most recent fault record.

P4 - 03★ ASH4 Fault Record (N-3) Address: 0406H, 0407H

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 4.4.1
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A

7-74 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Data Size: 32-bit

Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the fourth most recent fault record.

P4 - 04★ ASH5 Fault Record (N-4) Address: 0408H, 0409H

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 4.4.1
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the fifth most recent fault record.

P4 - 05 JOG JOG Operation Address: 040AH, 040BH

Default: 20 Related Section: Section 4.4.2

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: r/min
Range: 0 ~ 5000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
JOG operation command:
1. Operation Test
(1) Press the SET key to display the JOG speed. (The default value is 20 r/min).
(2) Press the UP or DOWN arrow keys to increase or decrease the desired JOG
speed. (This also can be undertaken by using the SHIFT key to move the
cursor to the desired unit column (the effected number will flash) then
changed using the UP and DOWN arrow keys).
(3) Press the SET when the desired JOG speed is displayed. The Servo Drive will
display "JOG".
(4) Press the UP or DOWN arrow keys to jog the motor either P(CCW) or N(CW)
direction. The motor will only rotation while the arrow key is activated.
(5) To change JOG speed again, press the MODE key. The servo Drive will
display "P4 - 05". Press the SET key and the JOG speed will displayed again.
Refer back to #(2) and #(3) to change speed.
(6) In JOG operation mode, if any fault occurs, the motor will stop running. The
maximum JOG speed is the rated speed of the servo motor.

Revision June 2010 7-75

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

2. DI Signal Control
Set the value of DI signal as JOGU and JOGD (refer to Table 8.A).
Users can perform JOG run forward and run reverse control.
3. Communication Control
To perform a JOG Operation via communication command, use communication
addresses 040AH and 040BH.
(1) Enter 1 ~ 5000 for the desired JOG speed
(2) Enter 4998 to JOG in the P(CCW) direction
(3) Enter 4999 to JOG in the N(CW) direction
(4) Enter 0 to stop the JOG operation
Please note that when using communication control, please set P2-30 to 5 to
avoid that there are excessive writes to the system flash memory.

P4 - 06
FOT Force Output Contact Control Address: 040CH, 040DH
▲■

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 4.4.3
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 0xFF
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
The function of Digital Outout (DO) is determined by the DO setting value. The
user can set DO setting value (0x30 ~ 0x3F) via communication and then write the
values into P4-06 to complete the settings.
Bit00 corresponds with DO setting value 0x30
Bit01 corresponds with DO setting value 0x31
Bit02 corresponds with DO setting value 0x32
Bit03 corresponds with DO setting value 0x33
Bit04 corresponds with DO setting value 0x34
Bit05 corresponds with DO setting value 0x35
Bit06 corresponds with DO setting value 0x36
Bit07 corresponds with DO setting value 0x37
Bit08 corresponds with DO setting value 0x38
Bit09 corresponds with DO setting value 0x39
Bit10 corresponds with DO setting value 0x3A
Bit11 corresponds with DO setting value 0x3B
Bit12 corresponds with DO setting value 0x3C
Bit13 corresponds with DO setting value 0x3D

7-76 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Bit14 corresponds with DO setting value 0x3E

Bit15 corresponds with DO setting value 0x3F
For example:
When P2-18 is set to 0x0130, it indicates that the state of DO1 is the Bit00 state of
P4-06.
This parameter can also be used to force the state of DO signal. Please refer to
P2-18 ~ P2-22 to assign the functions of digital outouts (DO signals) and section
4.4.3 for the Force Outputs Operation.

P4 - 07■ ITST Input Status Address: 040EH, 040FH

Default: 0 Related Section: Section 4.4.4

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 8.2
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 01FF
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
The control of digital inputs can be determined by the external terminals (DI1 ~
DI9) or by the internal software digital inputs SDI1 ~ SDI9 (corresponds to Bit0 ~
Bit8 of P1-47) via communication (upon software). Please refer to P3-06 and
section 8.2 for the setting method.
P3-06

External DIs
Read or Write
Final DI Status
Internal DIs

Read P4-07: Display the final status of DI input signal.

Write P4-07: Write the status of software digital inputs SDI1 ~ SDI9
(No matter the servo drive is controller through digital keypad or communication
control, the function of this parameter is the same.)
For example:
External Control: Display the final status of DI input signal
When the read value of P4-07 is 0x0011, it indicates that DI1 and DI5 are ON.
Communication Control (Internal DIs): Read the status of input signal (upon
software).
For example:
When the write value of P4-07 is 0x0011, it indicates that software digital inputs
SDI1 and SDI5 are ON.
Bit0 ~ Bit8 corresponds with DI1 ~ DI9.
For the settings of DI1 ~ DI9, please refer to P2-10 ~ P2-17 and P2-36.

Revision June 2010 7-77

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

P4 - 08★ PKEY Digital Keypad Input of Servo Drive Address: 0410H, 0411H

Default: N/A Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: Read only
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to check if MODE, UP, DOWN, SHIFT, and SET keys on the
drive keypad being pressed or not. It is used to examine if these five keys work
normally via communication during production.

P4 - 09★ MOT Output Status Address: 0412H, 0413H

Default: N/A Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 4.4.5
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 0x1F
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
There is no difference when reading DO output signal via the drive keypad or the
communication. For the status of DO output signal, please refer to P2-18 ~ P2-22.

P4 - 10■ CEN Adjustment Function Address: 0414H, 0415H

Default: 0 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 6
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
0: Reserved
1: Execute analog speed input drift adjustment
2: Execute analog torque input drift adjustment
3: Execute current detector (V phase) drift adjustment
4: Execute current detector (W phase) drift adjustment
5: Execute drift adjustment of the above 1~4
6: Execute IGBT NTC calibration

7-78 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Please note:
1. This adjustment function is enabled after parameter P2-08 is set to 20.
2. When executing any adjustment, the external wiring connected to analog
speed or torque must be removed and the servo system should be off (Servo
off).

P4 - 11 SOF1 Analog Speed Input Drift Adjustment 1 Address: 0416H, 0417H

Default: Factory setting Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 32767
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
The adjustment functions from P4-11 through P4-19 are enabled after parameter
P2-08 is set to 22. Although these parameters allow the users to execute manual
adjustment, we still do not recommend the users to change the default setting
value of these parameters (P4-11 ~ P4-19) manually.
Please note that when P2-08 is set to 10, the users cannot reset this parameter.

P4 - 12 SOF2 Analog Speed Input Drift Adjustment 2 Address: 0418H, 0419H

Default: Factory setting Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 32767
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Refer to P4-11 for explanation.
Please note that when P2-08 is set to 10, the users cannot reset this parameter.

P4 - 13 TOF1 Analog Torque Drift Adjustment 1 Address: 041AH, 041BH

Default: Factory setting Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 32767
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:

Revision June 2010 7-79

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Refer to P4-11 for explanation.

Please note that when P2-08 is set to 10, the users cannot reset this parameter.

P4 - 14 TOF2 Analog Torque Drift Adjustment 2 Address: 041AH, 041BH

Default: Factory setting Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 32767
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Refer to P4-11 for explanation.
Please note that when P2-08 is set to 10, the users cannot reset this parameter.

Current Detector Drift Adjustment (V1

P4 - 15 COF1 Address: 041EH, 041FH
phase)

Default: Factory setting Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 32767
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Refer to P4-11 for explanation.
Please note that when P2-08 is set to 10, the users cannot reset this parameter.

Current Detector Drift Adjustment (V2

P4 - 16 COF2 Address: 0420H, 0421H
phase)

Default: Factory setting Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 32767
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Refer to P4-11 for explanation.
Please note that when P2-08 is set to 10, the users cannot reset this parameter.

7-80 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Current Detector Drift Adjustment (W1

P4 - 17 COF3 Address: 0422H, 0423H
phase)

Default: Factory setting Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 32767
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Refer to P4-11 for explanation.
Please note that when P2-08 is set to 10, the users cannot reset this parameter.

Current Detector Drift Adjustment (W2

P4 - 18 COF4 Address: 0424H, 0425H
phase)

Default: Factory setting Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 32767
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Refer to P4-11 for explanation.
Please note that when P2-08 is set to 10, the users cannot reset this parameter.

P4 - 19 TIGB IGBT NTC Calibration Address: 0426H, 0427H

Default: Factory setting Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 1 ~ 3
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Refer to P4-11 for explanation.
When executing this auto adjustment, please ensure to cool the servo drive to
o
25 C.

Revision June 2010 7-81

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Analog Monitor Output Drift Adjustment

P4 - 20 DOF1 Address: 0428H, 0429H
(CH1)

Default: Factory setting Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.4.4
Unit: mV
Range: -800 ~ 800
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Please note that when P2-08 is set to 10, the users cannot reset this parameter.

Analog Monitor Output Drift Adjustment

P4 - 21 DOF2 Address: 042AH, 042BH
(CH2)

Default: 0 Related Section:

Applicable Control Mode: ALL Section 6.4.4
Unit: mV
Range: -800 ~ 800
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Please note that when P2-08 is set to 10, the users cannot reset this parameter.

P4 - 22 SAO Analog Speed Input Offset Address: 042CH, 042DH

Default: 0 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: S
Unit: mV
Range: -5000 ~ 5000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
In speed mode, the users can use this parameter to add an offset value to analog
speed input.

P4 - 23 TAO Analog Torque Input Offset Address: 042EH, 042FH

Default: 0 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: T
Unit: mV
Range: -5000 ~ 5000
Data Size: 16-bit

7-82 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Display Format: Decimal

Settings:
In speed mode, the users can use this parameter to add an offset value to analog
speed input.

P4 - 24 LVL Undervoltage Error Level Address: 0430H, 0431H

Default: 160 Related Section: N/A

Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: V (rms)
Range: 140 ~ 190
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
When DC Bus voltage is lower than the value of P4-24 x 2 , the fault, Undervoltage
will occur.

Revision June 2010 7-83

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Table 7.A Input Function Definition

Setting value: 0x01

Trigger Control
DI Name DI Function Description
Method Mode

Servo On. When this DI is activated, it indicates the Level

SON All
servo drive is enabled. Triggered

Setting value: 0x02

Trigger Control
DI Name DI Function Description
Method Mode

A number of Faults (Alarms) can be cleared by

activating ARST. Please see table 10-3 for applicable
faults that can be cleared with the ARST command. Rising-edge
ARST All
However, please investigate Fault or Alarm if it does Triggered
not clear or the fault description warrants closer
inspection of the drive system.

Setting value: 0x03

Trigger Control
DI Name DI Function Description
Method Mode

Gain switching in speed and position mode. When

GAINUP is activated (P2-27 is set to 1), the gain is Level
GAINUP PT S
switched to the gain multiplied by gain switching Triggered
rate.

Setting value: 0x04

Trigger Control
DI Name DI Function Description
Method Mode

When CCLR is activated, the setting parameter P2-50

Rising-edge
Pulse Clear Mode is executed.
Triggered,
CCLR 0: After CCLR is activated (ON), the position PT
Level
accumulated pulse number will be cleared
Triggered
continuously.

7-84 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Setting value: 0x05

Trigger Control
DI Name DI Function Description
Method Mode

When this signal is On and the motor speed value is

lower than the setting value of P1-38, it is used to lock
the motor in the instant position while ZCLAMP is On.
Speed
Command

Setting value of
P1-38 (Zero speed)
Level
ZCLAMP S
ZCLAMP Triggered
input signal
OFF ON

Motor Speed

Setting value of
P1-38 (Zero speed)
Time

Setting value: 0x06

Trigger Control
DI Name DI Function Description
Method Mode

Command input reverse control. When the drive is in

Level
CMDINV the Position, Speed and Torque mode, and CMDINV is S, T
Triggered
activated, the motor is in reverse rotation.

Setting value: 0x07

Trigger Control
DI Name DI Function Description
Method Mode

Reserved

Setting value: 0x09

Trigger Control
DI Name DI Function Description
Method Mode

Torque limit enabled. When the drive is in speed and

position mode, and TRQLM is activated, it indicates
Level
TRQLM the torque limit command is valid. The torque limit PT, S
Triggered
command source is internal parameter or analog
voltage.

Revision June 2010 7-85

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Setting value: 0x10

Trigger Control
DI Name DI Function Description
Method Mode

Speed limit enabled. When the drive is in torque

mode and SPDLM is activated, it indicates the speed Level
SPDLM T
limit command is valid. The speed limit command Triggered
source is internal parameter or analog voltage.

Setting value: 0x14 ~ 0x15

DI Trigger Control
DI Function Description
Name Method Mode

Speed command selection 0 ~ 1 (Command S1 ~ S4)

DI signal of
Command Command
CN1 Content Range
No. Source
SPD1 SPD0
Voltage
External
between
S analog +/-10 V
V-REF and
Mode

SPD0 command Level

S1 OFF OFF GND S
SPD1 Speed Triggered
Sz None command 0
is 0
S2 OFF ON P1-09
-60000
S3 ON OFF Internal P1-10 ~
parameter +60000
S4 ON ON P1-11 r/min

Setting value: 0x16 ~ 0x17

DI Trigger Control
DI Function Description
Name Method Mode

Torque command selection 0 ~ 1 (Command T1 ~ T4)

DI signal of
Command Command
CN1 Content Range
No. Source
TCM1 TCM0
Voltage
Analog between
T +/-10 V
TCM0 command V-REF and Level
Mode

T1 OFF OFF GND T

TCM1 Torque Triggered
Tz None command 0
is 0
T2 OFF ON P1-12
Internal -300 ~
T3 ON OFF P1-13
parameter +300 %
T4 ON ON P1-14

7-86 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Setting value: 0x18

Trigger Control
DI Name DI Function Description
Method Mode

Speed / Position mode switching. Level

S-P P, S
OFF: Speed mode, ON: Position mode Triggered

Setting value: 0x19

Trigger Control
DI Name DI Function Description
Method Mode

Speed / Torque mode switching. Level

S-T S, T
OFF: Speed mode, ON: Torque mode Triggered

Setting value: 0x20

Trigger Control
DI Name DI Function Description
Method Mode

Torque / Position mode switching. Level

T-P P, T
OFF: Torque mode, ON: Position mode Triggered

Setting value: 0x21

Trigger Control
DI Name DI Function Description
Method Mode

Emergency stop. It should be contact “b” and Level

EMGS All
normally ON or a fault (AL013) will display. Triggered

Setting value: 0x22

Trigger Control
DI Name DI Function Description
Method Mode

Reverse inhibit limit. It should be contact “b” and Level

NL(CWL) All
normally ON or a fault (AL014) will display. Triggered

Setting value: 0x23

Trigger Control
DI Name DI Function Description
Method Mode

Forward inhibit limit. It should be contact “b” and Level

PL(CCWL) All
normally ON or a fault (AL015) will display. Triggered

Revision June 2010 7-87

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Setting value: 0x25

Trigger Control
DI Name DI Function Description
Method Mode

Torque limit - Reverse operation (Torque limit Level

TLLM PT, S
function is valid only when P1-02 is enabled) Triggered

Setting value: 0x26

Trigger Control
DI Name DI Function Description
Method Mode

Torque limit - Forward operation (Torque limit Level

TRLM PT, S
function is valid only when P1-02 is enabled) Triggered

Setting value: 0x37

Trigger Control
DI Name DI Function Description
Method Mode

Forward JOG input. When JOGU is activated, the Level

JOGU All
motor will JOG in forward direction. [see P4-05] Triggered

Setting value: 0x38

Trigger Control
DI Name DI Function Description
Method Mode

Reverse JOG input. When JOGD is activated, the motor Level

JOGD All
will JOG in reverse direction. [see P4-05] Triggered

Setting value: 0x43, 0x44

Trigger Control
DI Name DI Function Description
Method Mode

Electronic gear ratio (Numerator) selection 0 ~ 1 [see

P2-60 ~ P2-62]

GNUM0 Level
PT
GNUM1 Triggered

7-88 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Setting value: 0x45

Trigger Control
DI Name DI Function Description
Method Mode

Pulse inhibit input. When the drive is in position

Level
INHP mode, if INHP is activated, the external pulse input PT
Triggered
command is not valid.

NOTE

1) 11 ~ 17: Single control mode, 18 ~ 20: Dual control mode

2) When P2-10 to P2-17 and P2-36 is set to 0, it indicates input function is disabled.

Revision June 2010 7-89

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Table 7.B Output Function Definition

Setting value: 0x01

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

Servo ready. SRDY is activated when the servo drive is

Level
SRDY ready to run. All fault and alarm conditions, if All
Triggered
present, have been cleared.

Setting value: 0x02

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

SON is activated when control power is applied the

servo drive. The drive may or may not be ready to run
as a fault / alarm condition may exist.
Servo ON (SON) is "ON" with control power applied to Level
SON All
the servo drive, there may be a fault condition or not. Triggered
The servo is not ready to run. Servo ready (SRDY) is
"ON" where the servo is ready to run, NO fault / alarm
exists.

Setting value: 0x03

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

ZSPD is activated when the drive senses the motor is

equal to or below the Zero Speed Range setting as
defined in parameter P1-38.
Level
ZSPD For Example, at factory default ZSPD will be activated All
Triggered
when the drive detects the motor rotating at speed at
or below 10 r/min, ZSPD will remain activated until
the motor speed increases above 10 r/min.

7-90 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Setting value: 0x04

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

TSPD is activated once the drive has detected the

motor has reached the Target Rotation Speed setting
Level
TSPD as defined in parameter P1-39. TSPD will remain All
Triggered
activated until the motor speed drops below the
Target Rotation Speed.

Setting value: 0x05

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

1. When the drive is in PT mode, TPOS will be activated

when the position error is equal and below the Level
TPOS PT
setting value of P1-54. Triggered

Setting value: 0x06

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

TQL is activated when the drive has detected that the

All,
motor has reached the torques limits set by either the Level
TQL except T,
parameters P1-12 ~ P1-14 of via an external analog Triggered
Tz
voltage.

Setting value: 0x07

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

ALRM is activated when the drive has detected a fault

condition. (However, when Reverse limit error,
Level
ALRM Forward limit error, Emergency stop, Serial All
Triggered
communication error, and Undervoltage these fault
occur, WARN is activated first.)

Revision June 2010 7-91

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Setting value: 0x08

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

Electromagnetic brake control. BRKR is activated

(Actuation of motor brake). (Please refer to
parameters P1-42 ~ P1-43)

Level
BRKR All
Triggered

Setting value: 0x10

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

Output overload warning. OLW is activated when the

servo drive has detected that the motor has reached
the output overload time set by parameter P1-56.
tOL = Permissible Time for Overload x setting value of
P1-56
When overload accumulated time (continuously
overload time) exceeds the value of tOL, the overload
warning signal will output, i.e. DO signal, OLW will be
ON. However, if the accumulated overload time
(continuous overload time) exceeds the permissible
time for overload, the overload alarm (AL006) will
Level
OLW occur. All
Triggered
For example:
If the setting value of parameter P1-56 (Output
Overload Warning Time) is 60%, when the permissible
time for overload exceeds 8 seconds at 200% rated
output, the overload fault (AL006) will be detected
and shown on the LED display.
At this time, tOL = 8 x 60% = 4.8 seconds
Result:
When the drive output is at 200% rated output and the
drive is continuously overloaded for 4.8 seconds, the
overload warning signal will be ON (DO code is 0x10,

7-92 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

i.e. DO signal OLW will be activated). If the drive is

continuously overloaded for 8 seconds, the overload
alarm will be detected and shown on the LED display
(AL006). Then, Servo Fault signal will be ON (DO
signal ALRM will be activated).

Setting value: 0x11

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

Servo warning activated. WARN is activated when the

drive has detected Reverse limit error. Forward limit Level
WARN All
error, Emergency stop, Serial communication error, Triggered
and Undervoltage these fault conditions.

Setting value: 0x13

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

Reverse software limit. SNL is activated when the

SNL Level
servo drive has detected that reverse software limit is All
(SCWL) Triggered
reached.

Setting value: 0x14

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

Forward software limit. SPL is activated when the

SPL Level
servo drive has detected that forward software limit is All
(SCCWL) Triggered
reached.

Setting value: 0x19

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

Speed reached output. SP_OK will be activated when

Level
SP_OK the speed error is equal and below the setting value of S, Sz
Triggered
P1-47.

Revision June 2010 7-93

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Setting value: 0x30

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

Level
SDO_0 Output the status of bit00 of P4-06. All
Triggered

Setting value: 0x31

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

Level
SDO_1 Output the status of bit01 of P4-06. All
Triggered

Setting value: 0x32

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

Level
SDO_2 Output the status of bit02 of P4-06. All
Triggered

Setting value: 0x33

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

Level
SDO_3 Output the status of bit03 of P4-06. All
Triggered

Setting value: 0x34

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

Level
SDO_4 Output the status of bit04 of P4-06. All
Triggered

Setting value: 0x35

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

Level
SDO_5 Output the status of bit05 of P4-06. All
Triggered

7-94 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Setting value: 0x36

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

Level
SDO_6 Output the status of bit06 of P4-06. All
Triggered

Setting value: 0x37

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

Level
SDO_7 Output the status of bit07 of P4-06. All
Triggered

Setting value: 0x38

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

Level
SDO_8 Output the status of bit08 of P4-06. All
Triggered

Setting value: 0x39

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

Level
SDO_9 Output the status of bit09 of P4-06. All
Triggered

Setting value: 0x3A

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

Level
SDO_A Output the status of bit10 of P4-06. All
Triggered

Setting value: 0x3B

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

Level
SDO_B Output the status of bit11 of P4-06. All
Triggered

Revision June 2010 7-95

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 7 Servo Parameters

Setting value: 0x3C

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

Level
SDO_C Output the status of bit12 of P4-06. All
Triggered

Setting value: 0x3D

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

Level
SDO_D Output the status of bit13 of P4-06. All
Triggered

Setting value: 0x3E

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

Level
SDO_E Output the status of bit14 of P4-06. All
Triggered

Setting value: 0x3F

Trigger Control
DO Name DO Function Description
Method Mode

Level
SDO_F Output the status of bit15 of P4-06. All
Triggered

NOTE

1) When P2-18 to P2-22 and P2-37 is set to 0, it indicates output function is disabled.

7-96 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications

8.1 Communication Hardware Interface

The ASDA-B2 series servo drive has three modes of communication: RS-232 and RS-485. All
aspects of control, operation and monitoring as well as programming of the controller can be
achieved via communication. The two communication modes can be used at a time. Please
refer to the following sections for connections and limitations.
RS-232

„ Configuration

„ Cable Connection

Revision June 2010 8-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications

NOTE

1) Recommended maximum cable length is 15m (50ft.). Please note, RFI / EME noise should be
kept to a minimum, communication cable should kept apart from high voltage wires. If a
transmission speed of 38400 bps or greater is required, the maximum length of the
communication cable is 3m (9.84ft.) which will ensure the correct and desired baud rate.

2) The number shown in the pervious figure indicates the terminal number of each connector.

RS-485

„ Configuration

8-2 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications

„ Cable Connection

NOTE

3) The maximum cable length is 100m (39.37inches) when the servo drive is installed in a
location where there are only a few interferences. Please note, RFI / EME noise should be kept
to a minimum, communication cable should kept apart from high voltage wires. If a
transmission speed of 38400 bps or greater is required, the maximum length of the
communication cable is 15m (50ft.) which will ensure the correct and desired baud rate.

4) The number shown in the pervious figure indicates the terminal number of each connector.

5) The power supply should provide a +12V and higher DC voltage.

6) Please use a REPEATER if more than 32 synchronous axes are required.

7) For the terminal identification of CN3, please refer to Section 3.5.

Revision June 2010 8-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications

8.2 Communication Parameter Settings

The following describes the communication addresses for the communication parameters.
For communication parameters, please refer to the Chapter 7.
Range: 0x01 ~ 0x7F
Default: 0x7F
0300H
Settings (Hexadecimal):
0301H
Communication 0 0 Y X
Address Setting
Range － － 0~7 0~F

When using RS-232/485 and CANbus communication, this parameter is used set the
communication address in hexadecimal format. If the AC servo drive is controlled by RS-
232/485 communication, each drive (or device) must be uniquely identified. One servo
drive only can set one address. If the address is duplicate, there will be a communication
fault. This address is an absolute address which represents the servo drive on a RS-
232/485 or CANbus network. When the address of host (external) controller is set to 0xFF,
it is with auto-respond function. Then, the servo drive will receive from and respond to
host (external) controller both no matter the address is matching or not. However, the
parameter P3-00 cannot be set to 0xFF.

0302H Default: 0x0033

0303H Settings (Hexadecimal):
Transmission 0 Z Y X
Speed
COM Port － － RS-485 RS-232
Range ０ ０ 0~5 0~5
Settings:
0: Baud rate 4800 (data transmission speed: bits / second)
1: Baud rate 9600 (data transmission speed: bits / second)
2: Baud rate 19200 (data transmission speed: bits / second)
3: Baud rate 38400 (data transmission speed: bits / second)
4: Baud rate 57600 (data transmission speed: bits / second)
5: Baud rate 115200 (data transmission speed: bits / second)

8-4 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications

This parameter is used to set the desired transmission speed between the computer and
AC servo drive. Users can set this parameter and control transmission speed to reach the
maximum baud rate of 115200 bps.
0304H Default: 0x0066
0305H Settings:
Communication 0: Modbus ASCII mode, <7,N,2>
Protocol 1: Modbus ASCII mode, <7,E,1 >
2: Modbus ASCII mode, <7,O,1>
3: Modbus ASCII mode, <8,N,2 >
4: Modbus ASCII mode, <8,E,1>
5: Modbus ASCII mode, <8,O,1>
6: Modbus RTU mode, <8,N,2>
7: Modbus RTU mode, <8,E,1>
8: Modbus RTU mode, <8,O,1>

This parameter is used to set the communication protocol. The alphanumeric characters
represent the following: 7 or 8 is the number of data bits; N, E or O refer to the parity bit,
Non, Even or Odd; the 1 or 2 is the numbers of stop bits.
0306H Default: 0
0307H Range: 0~1
Transmission Settings:
Fault Treatment 0: Display fault and continue operating
1: Display fault and stop operating

This parameter is used to determine the operating sequence once a communication fault
has been detected. If '1' is selected the drive will stop operating upon detection the
communication fault. The mode of stopping is set by parameter P1-32.
0308H Watch Dog Timer (It is not recommended to change the factory
0309H default setting if not necessary)
Communication Default: 0
Time Out Range: 0~20 sec.
Detection The factory default setting is set to 0 and it indicates this function is
disabled.

When this parameter is set to any value over 0, it indicates that the timer is enabled. The
value set in this parameter is the communication time and the communication time out
detection should be completed within the time. Otherwise, a communication error will
occur.
For example, if the value set in this parameter is 5, it indicates that the communication
time out detection will be activated once in five seconds or a communication error will
occur.
030AH Communication selection:
030BH Default: 0
Communication RS-232 communication selects MODBUS or communicates with ASDA-
Mode Soft.

Revision June 2010 8-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications

Settings:
0: RS-232
1: RS-485

Multiple communication modes RS232 and RS-485 cannot be used within one
communication ring.
Digital Input Control:
Range:0x0000 ~ 0x01FF
Default: 0
Bit0 ~ Bit 7 corresponds with DI1 ~ DI8. The least significant bit
030CH (Bit0) shows DI1 status and the most significant bit (Bit7) shows
030DH DI8 status.
Digital Input Bit8 ~ Bit14 corresponds with EDI9 ~ EDI14.
Communication Bit0 ~ Bit8 corresponds with DI1 ~ DI9.
Function Bit settings:
0: Digital input is controlled by external command.
1: Digital input is controlled by parameter P4-07.
For the settings of DI1 ~ DI8, please refer to P2-10 ~ P2-17.
For the settings of EDI9, please refer to P2-36.

The setting of this parameter determines how the Digital Inputs (DI) accept commands
and signals.
Input commands or signals through the DI can be either from an external source, through
the CN1 interface connector, or via communication (upon software). If this parameter is
set to "0", all commands are external and via CN1; if this parameter is set to
"FFFF"(hexadecimal), all the DI signals are via communication (upon software).
For example, if P3-06 is set to 55 ("binary" display is 01010101), it indicates that Digital
Inputs 1, 3, 5, & 7 are controlled by external commands and Digital Inputs 2, 4, 6, & 8 are
controlled by communication (upon software).
Please see Chapter 4.4.5 DI Signal Display Diagnosis Operation for display layout of the
Digital Signal selection.

The Digital Input Control parameter, P3-06 also works in conjunction with the Digital
Input Status parameter P4-07 which has several functions.
The contents of P4-07 is "read only" via the drive keypad and will display the state on or
off of the eight Digital Inputs which have been set in accordance to P3-06. For Example; if
P3-06 has been set to “FFFF” (All digital inputs are via communication (upon software))
and the P4-07 display is 11 ("binary" display is 00010001), it indicates that the state of
Digital Inputs 1 & 5 are on and the state of Digital Inputs 2, 3, 4, 6, 7 & 8 are off.
030EH Default: 0
030FH Range: 0~1000
Communication
Response Delay
Time

8-6 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications

This parameter is used to delay the communication time that servo drive responds to host
controller (external controller).
When this parameter is set to 0, it indicates that the communication time that servo drive
responds to host controller (external controller) will no be delayed.
Default: 0000
Range: 0~1000
Byte － － － H
Monitor
Function － － －
mode

0310H Range 0 0 0 0~3

0311H Setting:
Monitor Mode H：
0: Disabled, i.e. disable monitor function.
1: Reserve
2: High-speed monitor mode. The sampling time is 2000 times
per second and 4 channels can be monitored.
3: High-speed monitor mode. The sampling time is 4000 times
per second and 2 channels can be monitored.

This parameter is used to monitor the data of the servo drive via RS-485/232 device. The
monitor data can be displayed on PC upon the data scope function provided by ASDA-B2-
Soft software.

Revision June 2010 8-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications

8.3 MODBUS Communication Protocol

When using RS-232/485 serial communication interface, each ASDA-B2 series AC servo drive
has a pre-assigned communication address specified by parameter “P3-00”. The computer
then controls each AC servo drive according to its communication address. ASDA-B2 series AC
servo drive can be set up to communicate on a MODBUS networks using on of the following
modes: ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) or RTU (Remote Terminal
Unit). Users can select the desired mode along with the serial port communication protocol in
parameter “P3-02”.

„ Code Description:

ASCII Mode:
Each 8-bit data is the combination of two ASCII characters. For example, a 1-byte data: 64 Hex,
shown as ‘64’ in ASCII, consists of ‘6’ (36Hex) and ‘4’ (34Hex).
The following table shows the available hexadecimal characters and their corresponding ASCII
codes.
Character ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’ ‘4’ ‘5’ ‘6’ ‘7’
ASCII code 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H
Character ‘8’ ‘9’ ‘A’ ‘B’ ‘C’ ‘D’ ‘E’ ‘F’
ASCII code 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H

RTU Mode:
Each 8-bit data is the combination of two 4-bit hexadecimal characters. For example, a 1-byte
data: 64 Hex.

„ Data Format:
10-bit character frame (For 7-bit character)
7N2
Start Stop Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
bit bit

7-data bits
10-bits character frame

7E1
Start Even Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 parity bit

7-data bits
10-bits character frame

7O1
Start Odd Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 parity bit

7-data bits
10-bits character frame

8-8 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications

11-bit character frame (For 8-bit character)

8N2
Start Stop Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 bit bit
8-data bits
11-bits character frame

8E1
Start Even Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
parity bit
8-data bits
11-bits character frame

8O1
Start Odd Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
parity bit
8-data bits
11-bits character frame

„ Communication Protocol:

ASCII Mode:

STX Start character’: ’ (3AH)

ADR Communication address: 1-byte consists of 2 ASCII codes

CMD Command code: 1-byte consists of 2 ASCII codes

DATA(n-1)
Contents of data: n word = n x 2-byte consists of n x 4 ASCII codes,
…….
n≤12
DATA(0)

LRC Command code: 1-byte consists of 2 ASCII codes

End 1 End code 1: (0DH)(CR)

End 0 End code 0: (0AH)(LF)

RTU Mode:

STX A silent interval of more than 10ms

ADR Communication address: 1-byte
CMD Command code: 1-byte
DATA(n-1)
……. Contents of data: n word = n x 2-byte, n≤12
DATA(0)
CRC Command code: 1-byte
End 1 A silent interval of more than 10ms

Revision June 2010 8-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications

STX (Communication Start)

ASCII Mode: ’:’ character
RTU Mode: A silent interval of more than 10ms
ADR (Communication Address)
The valid communication addresses are in the range of 1 to 254.
For example, communication to AC servo drive with address 16 decimal:
ASCII Mode: ADR=’1’,’0’ => ‘1’=31H，’0’=30H
RTU Mode: ADR = 10H
CMD (Command Codes) and DATA (Data Characters)
The format of data characters depends on the command code. The available command codes
and examples for AC servo drive are described as follows:
Command code: 03H, read N words. The maximum value of N is 10.

For example, reading continuous 2 words from starting address 0200H of AC servo drive with
address 01H.
ASCII Mode:
Command message: Response message:

STX ‘:’ STX ‘:’

‘0’ ‘0’
ADR ADR
‘1’ ‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
CMD CMD
‘3’ ‘3’
‘0’ Number of data ‘0’

Starting data ‘2’ (Count by byte) ‘4'

address ‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ Contents of ‘0’
starting data
‘0’ address 0200H ‘B’
‘0’ ‘1’
Number of data
‘0’ ‘1’
‘2’ Contents of ‘F’
second data
‘F’ address 0201H ‘4’
LRC Check
‘8’ ‘0’
End 1 (0DH)(CR) ‘E’
LRC Check
End 0 (0AH)(LF) ‘8’
End 1 (0DH)(CR)
End 0 (0AH)(LF)

8-10 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications

RTU Mode:
Command message: Response message:

ADR 01H ADR 01H

CMD 03H CMD 03H

Starting data 02H (Upper bytes) Number of data

04H
address 00H (Lower bytes) (Count by byte)

Number of data 00H Contents of 00H (Upper bytes)

starting data
(Count by word) 02H address 0200H B1H (Lower bytes)

CRC Check Low C5H (Lower bytes) Contents of 1FH (Upper bytes)
second data
CRC Check High B3H (Upper bytes) address 0201H 40H (Lower bytes)

CRC Check Low A3H (Lower bytes)

CRC Check High D4H (Upper bytes)

Command code: 06H, write 1 word

For example, writing 100 (0064H) to starting data address 0200H of ASDA-B2 series with
address 01H.

ASCII Mode:
Command message: Response message:

STX ‘:’ STX ‘:’

‘0’ ‘0’
ADR ADR
‘1’ ‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
CMD CMD
‘6’ ‘6’
‘0’ ‘0’

Starting data ‘2’ Starting data ‘2'

address ‘0’ address ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
Content of data Content of data
‘6’ ‘6’
‘4’ ‘4’
‘9’ ‘9’
LRC Check LRC Check
‘3’ ‘3’
End 1 (0DH)(CR) End 1 (0DH)(CR)
End 0 (0AH)(LF) End 0 (0AH)(LF)

Revision June 2010 8-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications

RTU Mode:
Command message: Response message:

ADR 01H ADR 01H

CMD 06H CMD 06H

Starting data 02H (Upper bytes) Starting data 02H (Upper bytes)
address 00H (Lower bytes) address 00H (Lower bytes)
00H (Upper bytes) 00H (Upper bytes)
Content of data Content of data
64H (Lower bytes) 64H (Lower bytes)
CRC Check Low 89H (Lower bytes) CRC Check Low 89H (Lower bytes)
CRC Check High 99H (Upper bytes) CRC Check High 99H (Upper bytes)

LRC (ASCII Mode):

LRC (Longitudinal Redundancy Check) is calculated by summing up, module 256, the values
of the bytes from ADR to last data character then calculating the hexadecimal representation
of the 2’s-complement negation of the sum.
For example, reading 1 word from address 0201H of the ASDA-B2 series AC servo drive with
address 01H.

STX ‘:’
‘0’
ADR
‘1’
‘0’
CMD
‘3’
‘0’
‘2’
Starting data address
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
Number of data
‘0’
‘1’
‘F’
LRC Check
‘8’
End 1 (0DH)(CR)
End 0 (0AH)(LF)

01H+03H+02H+01H+00H+01H = 08H, the 2’s complement negation of 08H is F8H.

Hence, we can know that LRC CHK is ’F’,’8’.

8-12 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications

CRC (RTU Mode):

CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is calculated by the following steps:
Step 1: Load a 16-bit register (called CRC register) with FFFFH.
Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte of the command message with the low order byte of
the 16-bit CRC register, putting the result in the CRC register.
Step 3: Extract and examine the LSB. If the LSB of CRC register is 0, shift the CRC register one
bit to the right. If the LSB of CRC register is 1, shift the CRC register one bit to the
right, then Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value A001H.
Step 4: Repeat step 3 until eight shifts have been performed. When this is done, a complete 8-
bit byte will have been processed, then perform step 5.
Step 5: Repeat step 2 to step 4 for the next 8-bit byte of the command message.
Continue doing this until all bytes have been processed. The final contents of the CRC
register are the CRC value.

NOTE

1) When transmitting the CRC value in the message, the upper and lower bytes of the CRC
value must be swapped, i.e. the lower order byte will be transmitted first.

2) For example, reading 2 words from address 0101H of the AC servo drive with address 01H.
The final content of the CRC register from ADR to last data character is 3794H, then the
command message is shown as follows. What should be noticed is that 94H have to be
transmitted before 37H.

Command Message
ADR 01H
CMD 03H
Starting data address 01H (Upper byte)
01H (Lower bytes)
Number of data 00H (Upper bytes)
(Count by word) 02H (Lower bytes)
CRC Check Low 94H (Lower bytes)
CRC Check High 37H (Upper bytes)

End1, End0 (Communication End)

ASCII Mode:
In ASCII mode, (0DH) stands for character ’\r’ (carriage return) and (0AH) stands for
character ’\n’ (new line), they indicate communication end.

Revision June 2010 8-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications

RTU Mode:
In RTU mode, a silent interval of more than 10ms indicates communication end.

The following is an example of CRC generation using C language. The function takes two
arguments:
unsigned char* data;
unsigned char length

The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer.

unsigned int crc_chk(unsigned char* data, unsigned char length) {
int j;
unsigned int reg_crc=0xFFFF;

while( length-- ) {
reg_crc^= *data++;
for (j=0; j<8; j++ ) {
if( reg_crc & 0x01 ) { /*LSB(bit 0 ) = 1 */
reg_crc = (reg_crc >> 1)^0xA001;
} else {
reg_crc = (reg_crc>>1);
}
}
}
return reg_crc;
}
PC communication program example:
#include<stdio.h>
#include<dos.h>
#include<conio.h>
#include<process.h>
#define PORT 0x03F8 /* the address of COM 1 */
#define THR 0x0000
#define RDR 0x0000
#define BRDL 0x0000
#define IER 0x0001
#define BRDH 0x0001
#define LCR 0x0003
#define MCR 0x0004
#define LSR 0x0005
#define MSR 0x0006

8-14 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications

unsigned char rdat[60];

/* read 2 data from address 0200H of ASD with address 1 */
unsigned char tdat[60]={‘:’,’0’,’1’,’0’,’3’,’0’,’2’,’0’,’0’,’0’,’0’,’0’,’2’,’F’,’8’,’\r’,’\n’};
void main() {
int I;
outportb(PORT+MCR,0x08); /* interrupt enable */
outportb(PORT+IER,0x01); /* interrupt as data in */
outportb(PORT+LCR,( inportb(PORT+LCR) | 0x80 ) );
/* the BRDL/BRDH can be access as LCR.b7 == 1 */
outportb(PORT+BRDL,12);
outportb(PORT+BRDH,0x00);
outportb(PORT+LCR,0x06); /* set prorocol
<7,E,1> = 1AH, <7,O,1> = 0AH
<8,N,2> = 07H <8,E,1> = 1BH
<8,O,1> = 0BH
*/

for( I = 0; I<=16; I++ ) {

while( !(inportb(PORT+LSR) & 0x20) ); /* wait until THR empty */
outportb(PORT+THR,tdat[I]); /* send data to THR */
}
I = 0;
while( !kbhit() ) {
if( inportb(PORT+LSR)&0x01 ) { /* b0==1, read data ready */
rdat[I++] = inportb(PORT+RDR); /* read data from RDR */
}
}
}

Revision June 2010 8-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications

8.4 Communication Parameter Write-in and Read-out

There are following five groups for parameters:

Group 0: Monitor parameter (example: P0-xx)
Group 1: Basic parameter (example: P1-xx)
Group 2: Extension parameter (example: P2-xx)

Group 3: Communication parameter (example: P3-xx)

Group 4: Diagnosis parameter (example: P4-xx)
For a complete listing and description of all parameters, refer to Chapter 7.
Communication write-in parameters for ASDA-B2 series are including:
Group 0: All parameters except P0-00 ~ P0-01, P0-08 ~ P0-13 and P0-46

Group 1: P1-00 ~ P1-76

Group 2: P2-00 ~ P2-67
Group 3: P3-00 ~ P3-11

Group 4: All parameters except P4-00 ~ P4-04 and P4-08 ~ P4-09

NOTE

1) P3-01 After the new transmission speed is set, the next data will be written in new
transmission speed.

2) P3-02 After the new communication protocol is set, the next data will be written in new
communication protocol.

3) P4-05 JOG control of servo motor. For the description, refer to Chapter 7.

4) P4-06 Force output contact control. This parameter is for the users to test if DO (Digit
output) is normal. User can set 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32 to test DO1, DO2, DO3, DO4, DO5,
DO6 respectively. After the test has been completed, please set this parameter to 0
to inform the drive that the test has been completed.

5) P4-10 Adjustment function selection. If the user desires to change the settings of this
parameter, the user has to set the value of the parameter P2-08 to 20 (hexadecimal:
14H) first and then restart. After restarting, the settings of parameter P4-10 can
become modified.

6) P4-11 ~ P4-21 These parameters are for offset adjustment. Do not change the factory
default setting if not necessary. If the user desires to change the settings of
these parameters, the user has to set the value of the parameter P2-08 to 22
(hexadecimal: 16H) first and then restart. After restarting, the settings of
parameters P4-11 to P4-21 can become modified.

8-16 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications

Communication read-out parameters for ASDA-B2 series are including:

Group 0: P0-00 ~ P0-46
Group 1: P1-00 ~ P1-76
Group 2: P2-00 ~ P2-67
Group 3: P3-00 ~ P3-11
Group 4: P4-00 ~ P4-24

Revision June 2010 8-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications

This page intentionally left blank.

8-18 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspection

Delta AC servo drives are based on solid state electronics technology. Preventive maintenance
is required to operate this AC servo drives in its optimal condition, and to ensure a long life. It
is recommended to perform a periodic maintenance and inspection of the AC servo drive by a
qualified technician. Before any maintenance and inspection, always turn off the AC input
power to the unit.

¾ Be sure to disconnect AC power and ensure that the internal capacitors have fully
discharged before performing the maintenance and inspection!

9.1 Basic Inspection

After power is in connected to the AC servo drive, the charge LED will be lit which indicates
that the AC servo drive is ready.

Item Content

z Periodically inspect the screws of the servo drive, motor shaft, terminal
block and the connection to mechanical system. Tighten screws as
necessary as they may loosen due to vibration and varying temperatures.
z Ensure that oil, water, metallic particles or any foreign objects do not fall
inside the servo drive, motor, control panel or ventilation slots and
General Inspection holes. As these will cause damage.
z Ensure the correct installation and the control panel. It should be free
from airborne dust, harmful gases or liquids.
z Ensure that all wiring instructions and recommendations are followed;
otherwise damage to the drive and or motor may result.

z Inspect the servo drive and servo motor to insure they were not
damaged.
z To avoid an electric shock, be sure to connect the ground terminal of
servo drive to the ground terminal of control panel.
z Before making any connection, wait 10 minutes for capacitors to
discharge after the power is disconnected, alternatively, use an
appropriate discharge device to discharge.
Inspection before z Ensure that all wiring terminals are correctly insulated.
operation
z Ensure that all wiring is correct or damage and or malfunction may
(Control power is result.
not applied)
z Visually check to ensure that there are not any unused screws, metal
strips, or any conductive or inflammable materials inside the drive.
z Never put inflammable objects on servo drive or close to the external
regenerative resistor.
z Make sure control switch is OFF.
z If the electromagnetic brake is being used, ensure that it is correctly
wired.

Revision June 2010 9-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspection

Item Content

Inspection before z If required, use an appropriate electrical filter to eliminate noise to the
operation servo drive.
(Control power is z Ensure that the external applied voltage to the drive is correct and
not applied) matched to the controller.
z Ensure that the cables are not damaged, stressed excessively or loaded
heavily. When the motor is running, pay close attention on the
connection of the cables and notice that if they are damaged, frayed or
over extended.
z Check for abnormal vibrations and sounds during operation. If the servo
motor is vibrating or there are unusual noises while the motor is
running, please contact the dealer or manufacturer for assistance.
z Ensure that all user-defined parameters are set correctly. Since the
Inspection during characteristics of various machinery are different, in order to avoid
operation accident or cause damage, do not adjust the parameter abnormally and
(Control power is ensure the parameter setting is not an excessive value.
applied)） z Ensure to reset some parameters when the servo drive is off (Please refer
to Chapter 7). Otherwise, it may result in malfunction.
z If there is no contact sound or there be any unusual noises when the
relay of the servo drive is operating, please contact your distributor for
assistance or contact with Delta.
z Check for abnormal conditions of the power indicators and LED display.
If there is any abnormal condition of the power indicators and LED
display, please contact your distributor for assistance or contact with
Delta.

9.2 Maintenance

„ Use and store the product in a proper and normal environment.

„ Periodically clean the surface and panel of servo drive and motor.

„ Make sure the conductors or insulators are corroded and/or damaged.

„ Do not disassemble or damage any mechanical part when performing maintenance.

„ Clean off any dust and dirt with a vacuum cleaner. Place special emphasis on cleaning the
ventilation ports and PCBs. Always keep these areas clean, as accumulation of dust and
dirt can cause unforeseen failures.

9-2 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspection

9.3 Life of Replacement Components

„ Smooth capacitor

The characteristics of smooth capacitor would be deteriorated by ripple current

affection. The life of smooth capacitor varies according to ambient temperature and
operating conditions. The common guaranteed life of smooth capacitor is ten years
when it is properly used in normal air-conditioned environment.

„ Relay

The contacts will wear and result in malfunction due to switching current. The life of
relay varies according to power supply capacity. Therefore, the common guaranteed life
of relay is cumulative 100,000 times of power on and power off.

„ Cooling fan

The cooling fan life is limited and should be changed periodically. The cooling fan will
reach the end of its life in 2~3 years when it is in continuous operation. However, it also
must be replaced if the cooling fan is vibrating or there are unusual noises.

Revision June 2010 9-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspection

This page intentionally left blank.

9-4 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

If a fault is detected on the servo drive or motor a corresponding fault code will be shown on
the drive's LED display. Fault codes can also be transmitted via communication, see P0-01 and
P4-00 ~ P4-04 for display on controller or HMI.

10.1 Fault Messages Table

Servo Drive Fault Messages

Fault Messages
Display Fault Name Fault Description
Main circuit current is higher than 1.5 multiple of
Overcurrent
motor’s instantaneous maximum current value.

Main circuit voltage has exceeded its maximum

Overvoltage
allowable value.

Main circuit voltage is below its minimum specified

Undervoltage
value.
The motor does not match the drive. They are not
Motor error
correctly matched for size (power rating).

Regeneration error Regeneration control operation is in error.

Overload Servo motor and drive is overload.

Motor’s control speed exceeds the limit of normal

Overspeed
speed.

Abnormal pulse Input frequency of pulse command exceeds the limit of

control command its allowable setting value.

Position control deviation value exceeds the limit of its

Excessive deviation
allowable setting value.

Reserve Reserve

Encoder error Pulse signal is in error.

Adjusted value exceeds the limit of its allowable setting

Adjustment error
value when perform electrical adjustment.

Emergency stop
Emergency stop switch is activated.
activated

Reverse limit switch

Reverse limit switch is activated.
error

Forward limit switch

Forward limit switch is activated.
error

Revision June 2010 10-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Fault Messages
Display Fault Name Fault Description
IGBT temperature
The temperature of IGBT is over high.
error

Memory error EE-PROM write-in and read-out is in error.

The encoder output exceeds the rated output

Encoder output error
frequency.

Serial communication
RS232/485 communication is in error.
error

Serial communication
RS232/485 communication time out.
time out

Reserve Reserve

Input power phase

One phase of the input power is loss.
loss

To warn that the servo motor and drive is going to

overload. This alarm will display before ALM06. When
the servo motor reach the setting value of P1-56, the
Pre-overload warning
motor will send a warning to the drive. After the drive
has detected the warning, the DO signal OLW will be
activated and this fault message will display.
Encoder initial The magnetic field of the encoder U, V, W signal is in
magnetic field error error.
Encoder internal The internal memory of the encoder is in error. An
error internal counter error is detected.
Encoder data error An encoder data error is detected for three times.

Motor protection In order to protect the motor, this alarm will be

error activated when the setting value of P1-57 is reached
after a period of time set by P1-58.
U,V,W wiring error The wiring connections of U, V, W (for servo motor
output) and GND (for grounding) are in error.
DSP firmware EE-PROM is not reset after the firmware version is
upgrade upgraded.
This fault can be cleared after setting P2-08 to 30 first,
and then setting P2-08 to 28 next and restarting the
servo drive.

NOTE

1) If there is any unknown fault code that is not listed on the above table, please inform the
distributor or contact with Delta for assistance.

10-2 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

10.2 Potential Cause and Corrective Actions

Servo Drive Fault Messages

: Overcurrent

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

1. Check the wiring connections between Repair the short-circuited and
Short-circuit at drive drive and motor. avoid metal conductor being
output (U, V, W)
2. Check if the wire is short-circuited. exposed.

Follow the wiring steps in the

Check if the wiring steps are all correct
Motor wiring error user manual to reconnect
when connecting motor to drive.
wiring.
Please contact your distributor
IGBT error Heat sink overheated for assistance or contact with
Delta.
Set the setting back to factory
Control parameter Check if the setting value exceeds the default setting and then reset
setting error factory default setting. and adjust the parameter
setting again.
1. Ensure that input command
Control command Check if the control input command is frequency is stable (too
setting error unstable (too much fluctuation). much fluctuation).
2. Activate filter function.

: Overvoltage

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

The main circuit
voltage has Use voltmeter to check whether the input
Use correct power supply or
exceeded its voltage falls within the rated input
stabilizing power.
maximum allowable voltage.
value.
Input power error
Use voltmeter to check whether the input Use correct power supply or
(Incorrect power
voltage is within the specified limit. stabilizing power.
input)

: Undervoltage

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

The main circuit
voltage is below its Check whether the wiring of main circuit
Reconfirm voltage wiring.
minimum specified input voltage is normal.
value.
No input voltage at Use voltmeter to check whether input
Reconfirm power switch.
main circuit. voltage at main circuit is normal.
Input power error
Use voltmeter to check whether the input Use correct power supply or
(Incorrect power
voltage is within the specified limit. serial stabilizing power.
input)

Revision June 2010 10-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

: Motor error

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

Encoder is damage. Check Encoder for the damage. Repair or replace the motor.
Encoder is loose. Examine the Encoder connector. Install the motor again.
The type of the Check if the servo drive and servo motor Replace the motor.
servo motor is are not correctly matched for size (power
incorrect. rating).

: Regeneration error

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

Regenerative
Check the wiring connection of Reconnect regenerative
resistor is not
regenerative resistor. resistor.
connected.
Please contact your distributor
Regenerative switch Check if regenerative switch transistor is
for assistance or contact with
transistor fault short-circuited.
Delta.
Parameter setting is Confirm the parameter setting and Correctly reset parameter
in error specifications of regenerative resistor. again.

: Overload

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

The drive has
exceeded its rated
Increase motor capacity or
load during Check if the drive is overloaded.
reduce load.
continuous
operation.
Adjust gain value of control
Control system Check if there is mechanical vibration
circuit.
parameter setting is
incorrect. Decrease Accel/Decel time
Accel/Decel time setting is too fast.
setting.
The wiring of drive
and encoder is in Check the wiring of U, V, W and encoder. Ensure all wiring is correct.
error.

: Overspeed

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

Ensure that input command
Speed input
frequency is stable (not
command is not Use signal detector to detect if input
fluctuate too much) and
stable (too much signal is abnormal.
activate filter function (P1-06,
fluctuation).
P1-07 and P1-08).
Over-speed
Check if over-speed parameter setting Correctly set over-speed
parameter setting is
value is too low. parameter setting (P2-34).
defective.

10-4 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

: Abnormal pulse control command

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

Pulse command
frequency is higher Use pulse frequency detector to measure Correctly set the input pulse
than rated input input frequency. frequency.
frequency.

: Excessive deviation

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

Check the maximum deviation
Maximum deviation
parameter setting and observe the Increases the parameter
parameter setting is
position error value when the motor is setting value of P2-35.
too small.
running.
Gain value is too
Check for proper gain value. Correctly adjust gain value.
small.
Torque limit is too Correctly adjust torque limit
Check torque limit value.
low. value.
Reduce external applied load
There is an overload. Check for overload condition. or re-estimate the motor
capacity.

: Reserve

: Encoder error (Position detector fault)

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

1. Check if all wiring is correct.
The wiring of encoder 2. Check if the users conduct the
Ensure all wiring is correct.
is in error. wiring by the wiring information in
the user manual.
Encoder is loose Examine the encoder connector. Install the motor again.
The wiring of encoder
Check if all connections are tight. Conduct the wiring again.
is defective.
Encoder is damage Check the encoder for the damage. Repair or replace the motor.

: Adjustment error

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

If the error does not clear
The setting value of 1. Remove CN1 wiring. after executing the drift
drift adjustment has 2. Execute the drift adjustment again. adjustment again, please
exceeded its maximum (Set P2-08 to 20 first, and then set contact your distributor for
allowable value. P4-10 to 5.) assistance or contact with
Delta.

Revision June 2010 10-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

: Emergency stop activated

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

Emergency stop switch Check if emergency stop switch is On Activate emergency stop
is activated. or Off. switch.

: Reverse (CWL) limit switch error

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

Reverse limit switch is Check if reverse limit switch is On or
Activate reverse limit switch.
activated. Off.
Servo system is not Check the value of control parameter Modify parameter setting and
stable. setting and load inertia. re-estimate motor capacity.

: Forward (CCWL) limit switch error

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

Forward limit switch is Check if forward limit switch is On or
Activate forward limit switch.
activated. Off.
Servo system is not Check the value of control parameter Modify parameter setting and
stable. setting and load inertia. re-estimate motor capacity.

: IGBT temperature error

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

The drive has
exceeded its rated Check if there is overload or the motor Increase motor capacity or
load during current is too high. reduce load.
continuous operation.
Short-circuit at drive
Check the drive input wiring. Ensure all wiring is correct.
output.

: Memory error

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

1.If this fault occurs when
Examine the parameter settings. power is applied to the
Please do the following steps: drive, it indicates that the
setting value of one
1.Press SHIFT key on the drive keypad,
parameter has exceeded the
and examine the parameter shown
specified range. Correct the
on LED display.
setting value of the
Parameter data error 2.If E320A is displayed (in parameter to clear the fault
when writing into EE- hexadecimal format), it indicates it is and restart the servo drive.
PROM. parameter P2-10. Please examine the
2.If this fault occurs during
parameter settings of P2-10.
normal operation, it
3.If E3610 is displayed (in hexadecimal indicates that the error
format), it indicates it is parameter occurs when writing data
P6-16. Please examine the parameter into EE-PROM. Turn ARST (DI
settings of P6-16. signal) ON to clear the fault
or restart the servo drive.

10-6 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

If this fault occurs when
resetting the parameter
The setting value of Press SHIFT key on the drive keypad
settings, it indicates that the
hidden parameter is in and examine if E100X is displayed on
servo drive type is not set
error. LED display.
correctly. Correctly set the
servo drive type again.
If this fault occurs when power
is applied to the drive, it
indicates that the data in EE-
Press SHIFT key on the drive keypad
Data in EE-PROM is RPM is damaged or there is no
and examine if E0001 is displayed on
damaged. data in EE-PROM. Please
LED display.
contact your distributor for
assistance or contact with
Delta.

: Encoder output error

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

Check if the recent fault records (P4-
Encoder itself or the 00 ~ P4-05) display on the drive Perform the corrective actions
wiring of encoder is in keypad in accordance with the fault as described in AL011, AL024,
error. codes AL011, AL024, AL025 and AL025 and AL026.
AL026.
Check if the following conditions Correctly set P1-76 and P1-46.
The output frequency occur: 1.Ensure that the motor speed
for pulse output may Condition 1: Motor speed is above the is below the value set by P1-
exceed the limit of its value set by P1-76. 76.
allowable setting Condition 2: 2.
value. Motor Speed Motor Speed
× P1 − 46 × 4 > 19.8 × 10
6
× P1 − 46 × 4 < 19.8 × 106
60 60

: Serial communication error

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

Communication
Check the communication parameter Correctly set parameter
parameter setting is
setting. setting.
defective.
Communication Correctly set communication
Check the communication address.
address is incorrect. address.
Communication value Correctly set communication
Check the communication value.
is incorrect. value.

Revision June 2010 10-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

: Serial communication time out

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

Setting value in time
Check communication time out
out parameter is not Correctly set P3-07.
parameter setting.
correct.
Tighten the communication
Not receiving
cable, make sure the
communication Check whether communication cable is
communication cable is not
command for a long loose or broken.
damaged and ensure all wiring
time.
is correct.

: Reserve

: Input power phase loss

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

If the fault does not clear even
Check the power cable and when the three-phase power is
Control power supply connections of R, S, T. Check whether connected correctly, please
is in error. the power cable is loose or the contact your distributor for
possible loss of phase on input power. assistance or contact with
Delta.

: Pre-overload warning

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

1. Please refer to the
1. Check the load condition of the
correction actions of
servo motor and drive.
The drive is going to ALE06.
overload. 2. Check the setting value of P1-56.
2. Increase the setting value
Check whether the setting value of
of P1-56 or set P1-56 to
P1-56 is to small.
100 and above.

: Encoder initial magnetic field error

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

1.Check if the servo motor is properly
grounded.
2.Check if the encoder signal cables If the error does not clear after
The magnetic field of are placed in separate conduits from each checking is done, please
the encoder U, V, W the cables connected to R, S, T and contact your distributor for
signal is in error. U, V, W terminals to prevent the assistance or contact with
interference. Delta.
3.Check if the shielded cables are used
when performing encoder wiring.

10-8 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

: Encoder internal error

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

1.Please connect the
grounding (green color) of
U, V, W terminal to the
heatsink of the servo drive.
1.Check if the servo motor is properly 2.Ensure that the encoder
grounded. signal cables are placed in
separate conduits from the
The internal memory 2.Check if the encoder signal cables cables connected to R, S, T
are placed in separate conduits from and U, V, W terminals to
of the encoder is in
the cables connected to R, S, T and prevent the interference.
error. An encoder U, V, W terminals to prevent the
counter error occurs. interference. 3. Please use shielded cables
for Encoder wiring.
3.Check if the shielded cables are used
when performing encoder wiring. 4.If the error does not clear
after all the above actions
are done, please contact
your distributor for
assistance or contact with
Delta.

: Encoder data error

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

1.Please connect the
grounding (green color) of
U, V, W terminal to the
heatsink of the servo drive.
1.Check if the servo motor is properly 2. Ensure that the encoder
grounded. signal cables are placed in
separate conduits from the
2.Check if the encoder signal cables cables connected to R, S, T
are placed in separate conduits from and U, V, W terminals to
An encoder data error
the cables connected to R, S, T and prevent the interference.
occurs for three times. U, V, W terminals to prevent the
interference. 3. Please use shielded cables
for Encoder wiring.
3.Check if the shielded cables are used
when performing encoder wiring. 4.If the error does not clear
after all the above actions
are done, please contact
your distributor for
assistance or contact with
Delta.

Revision June 2010 10-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

: Motor protection error

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

1.Set P1-57 to 0.
The setting value of 2.Correctly set P1-57 and P1-
parameter P1-57 is 1.Check if P1-57 is enabled. 58. Please note that the
reached after a period 2.Check if the setting values of P1-57 over-low setting may results
of time set by in malfunction, but over-
and P1-58 are both too small.
parameter P1-58. high setting may let the
motor protection function
not operate.

: U,V,W wiring error

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

The wiring connections
Follow the wiring steps in the
of U, V, W (for servo
Check if wiring connections of U, V, W user manual to reconnect the
motor output) and
are not correct. wiring and ground the servo
GND (for grounding)
drive and motor properly.
are in error.

: DSP firmware upgrade

Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

EE-PROM is not reset Set P2-08 to 30 first, and then
Check if EE-PROM is reset after the
after the firmware 28 next, and restart the servo
firmware version is upgraded.
version is upgraded. drive.

10-10 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

10.3 Clearing Faults

Display Fault Name Clearing Method

Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault
Overcurrent
or restart the servo drive.
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault
Overvoltage
or restart the servo drive.
This fault message can be removed
Undervoltage automatically after the voltage has
returned within its specification.
This fault message can be removed by
Motor error
restarting the servo drive.
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault
Regeneration error
or restart the servo drive.
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault
Overload
or restart the servo drive.
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault
Overspeed
or restart the servo drive.
Abnormal pulse control Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault
command or restart the servo drive.
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault
Excessive deviation
or restart the servo drive.
Watch dog execution
This fault message cannot be cleared.
time out
This fault message can be removed by
Encoder error
restarting the servo drive.
This fault message can be removed after
the wiring of CN1 connector (I/O signal
Adjustment error
connector) is removed and auto
adjustment function is executed.
This fault message can be removed
Emergency stop
automatically by turning off EMGS (DI
activated
signal).
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault.
Reverse limit switch
This fault message can be removed when
error
the servo drive is Off (Servo Off)
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault.
Forward limit switch
This fault message can be removed when
error
the servo drive is Off (Servo Off)
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault
IGBT temperature error
or restart the servo drive.
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault
Memory error
or restart the servo drive.

Encoder output error Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault.

Revision June 2010 10-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

Display Fault Name Clearing Method

Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault.
Serial communication This fault message can also be removed
error automatically after the communication is
normal.
Serial communication Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault
time out or restart the servo drive.
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault
Command write-in error
or restart the servo drive.
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault.
This fault message can be removed
Input power phase loss
automatically after input power phase lost
problem is solved.
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault
Pre-overload warning
or restart the servo drive.
Encoder initial magnetic This fault message can be removed by
field error restarting the servo drive.
This fault message can be removed by
Encoder internal error
restarting the servo drive.
This fault message can be removed by
Encoder data error
restarting the servo drive.

Motor protection error Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault.

This fault message can be removed by

U,V,W wiring error
restarting the servo drive.
This fault message can be removed after
DSP firmware upgrade setting P2-08 to 30 first, and then 28 next
and restarting the servo drive.

10-12 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 11 Specifications

11.1 Specifications of Servo Drive (ASDA-B2 Series)

100W 200W 400W 750W 1kW 1.5kW 2kW 3kW
Model: ASD-B2 Series
01 02 04 07 10 15 20 30

Three-phase:
Three-phase: 170 ~ 255VAC, 50／60Hz ±5%
Phase / Voltage 170 ~ 255VAC,
supply
Power

Single-phase: 200 ~ 255VAC, 50／60Hz ±5%

50／60Hz ±5%
0.9 1.55 2.6 5.1 7.3 8.3 13.4 19.4
Continuous output current
Arms Arms Arms Arms Arms Arms Arms Arms
Cooling System Natural Air Circulation Fan Cooling
Encoder Resolution /
17-bit (160000 p/rev)
Feedback Resolution
Control of Main Circuit SVPWM Control
Tuning Modes Auto / Manual
Dynamic Brake - Built-in
Line driver: Max. 500Kpps (low speed)/ Max.4Mpps(high speed)
Max. Input Pulse Frequency
Open collector: Max. 200Kpps
Position Control Mode

Pulse Type Pulse + Direction, A phase + B phase, CCW pulse + CW pulse

Command Source External pulse train / Internal parameters
Smoothing Strategy Low-pass filter
Electronic gear N/M multiple
Electronic Gear N: 1 ~ (226-1)/M:1 ~ (231-1)
1/50 < N/M < 25600
Torque Limit Operation Set by parameters
Feed Forward
Set by parameters
Compensation
Voltage
Range 0 ~ ±10 VDC
Analog Input Input
10KΩ
Command Resistance
Time
2.2 us
Constant
Speed Control Mode

Speed Control Range*1 1:5000

Command Source External analog signal / Internal parameters
Smoothing Strategy Low-pass and S-curve filter
Torque Limit Operation Set by parameters or via Analog input
Responsiveness
Maximum 550Hz
Characteristic
0.01% or less at load fluctuation 0 to 100%
Speed Fluctuation Rate*2 0.01% or less at power fluctuation ±10%
(at rated speed)
o o
0.01% or less at ambient temperature fluctuation 0 C to 50 C

Revision June 2010 11-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 11 Specifications

100W 200W 400W 750W 1kW 1.5kW 2kW 3kW

Model: ASD-B2 Series
01 02 04 07 10 15 20 30
Voltage Range 0 ~ ±10 VDC
Torque Control Mode

Analog Input Input

10KΩ
Command Resistance
Time Constant 2.2 us
Command Source External analog signal / Internal parameters
Smoothing Strategy Low-pass filter
Speed Limit Operation Parameter Setting or via Analog input
Analog Monitor Output Monitor signal can set by parameters (Output voltage range: ±8V)
Servo On, Reset, Gain switching, Pulse clear, Zero speed CLAMP,
Command input reverse control, Speed/Torque limit enabled,
Speed command selection, Position / Speed mode switching, Speed
Inputs / Torque mode switching, Torque / Position mode switching,
Emergency stop, Forward / Reverse inhibit limit, Forward / Reverse
operation torque limit, Forward / Reverse JOG input, Electronic gear
Digital
ratio (Numerator) selection and Pulse inhibit input
Inputs/Outputs
Encoder signal output (A, B, Z Line Driver / Z Open collector)
Servo ready, Servo On, At Zero speed, At Speed reached, At
Outputs Positioning completed, At Torques limit, Servo alarm (Servo fault)
activated, Electromagnetic brake control, Output overload warning,
Servo warning activated
Overcurrent, Overvoltage, Undervoltage, Motor overheated,
Overload, Overspeed, Excessive deviation, Regeneration error,
Abnormal pulse control command, Encoder error, Adjustment
Protective Functions error, Emergency stop activated, Reverse/ Forward limit switch
error, IGBT temperature error, Serial communication error, Input
power phase loss, Serial communication time out, terminals with
short circuit protection (U, V ,W , CN1, CN2, CN3 terminals)
Communication Interface RS-232／RS-485
Indoor location (free from direct sunlight), no corrosive liquid and
Installation Site
gas (far away from oil mist, flammable gas, dust)
Altitude Altitude 1000m or lower above sea level
Atmospheric pressure 86kPa to 106kPa
o o

Operating Temperature 0 C to 55 C (32°F to 131°F) (If operating temperature is above

specified range, forced cooling will be required)
Environment

Storage Temperature -20℃ ~ 65℃

Humidity 0 to 90% (non-condensing)
2 2
Vibration 9.80665m/s (1G) less than 20Hz, 5.88m/ s (0.6G) 20 to 50Hz
IP Rating IP20
Power System TN System *4

IEC/EN 61800-5-1, UL 508C

Standards/Requirement

11-2 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 11 Specifications

Footnote:

*1 Rated rotation speed: When full load, speed ratio is defined as the minimum speed (the motor
will not pause).

*2 When command is rated rotation speed, the speed fluctuation rate is defined as:

(Empty load rotation speed – Full load rotation speed) / Rated rotation speed

*3 TN system: A power distribution system having one point directly earthed, the exposed
conductive parts of the installation being connected to that points by protective earth
conductor.

*4 Please refer to “Chart of load and operating time” in section 11.4 “Overload Characteristics”.

Revision June 2010 11-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 11 Specifications

11.2 Specifications of Servo Motor (ECMA Series)

Low Inertia Servo Motor

C204 C206 C208 C209 C210

Model: ECMA Series
01 02 04 04 07 07 10 10 20

Rated output power (kW) 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.75 0.75 1.0 1.0 2.0

Rated torque (N-m) *1 0.32 0.64 1.27 1.27 2.39 2.38 3.18 3.18 6.37

Maximum torque (N-m) 0.96 1.92 3.82 3.82 7.16 7.14 8.78 9.54 19.11

Rated speed (r/min) 3000

Maximum speed (r/min) 5000 3000 5000

Rated current (A) 0.90 1.55 2.60 2.60 5.10 3.66 4.25 7.30 12.05

Maximum current (A) 2.70 4.65 7.80 7.74 15.3 11 12.37 21.9 36.15
Power rating (kW/s)
27.7 22.4 57.6 22.1 48.4 29.6 38.6 38.1 90.6
(without brake)
Rotor moment of inertia
(× 10-4kg.m2) (without 0.037 0.177 0.277 0.68 1.13 1.93 2.62 2.65 4.45
brake)
Mechanical time constant
0.75 0.80 0.53 0.73 0.62 1.72 1.20 0.74 0.61
(ms) (without brake)
Torque constant-KT
0.36 0.41 0.49 0.49 0.47 0.65 0.75 0.43 0.53
(N-m/A)
Voltage constant-KE
13.6 16.0 17.4 18.5 17.2 27.5 24.2 16.8 19.2
(mV/(r/min))
Armature resistance
9.30 2.79 1.55 0.93 0.42 1.34 0.897 0.20 0.13
(Ohm)
Armature inductance (mH) 24.0 12.07 6.71 7.39 3.53 7.55 5.7 1.81 1.50
Electrical time constant
2.58 4.30 4.30 7.96 8.36 5.66 6.35 9.30 11.4
(ms)
Insulation class Class A (UL), Class B (CE)

Insulation resistance >100MΩ, DC 500V

Insulation strength 1500V AC, 60 seconds
Weight (kg) (without
0.5 1.2 1.6 2.1 3.0 2.9 3.8 4.3 6.2
brake)
Weight (kg) (with brake) 0.8 1.5 2.0 2.9 3.8 3.69 5.5 4.7 7.2

Max. radial shaft load (N) 78.4 196 196 245 245 245 245 490 490

Max. thrust shaft load (N) 39.2 68 68 98 98 98 98 98 98

Power rating (kW/s)
25.6 21.3 53.8 22.1 48.4 29.3 37.9 30.4 82.0
(with brake)
Rotor moment of inertia
0.04 0.192 0.30 0.73 1.18 1.95 2.67 3.33 4.95
(× 10-4kg.m2) (with brake)
Mechanical time constant
0.81 0.85 0.57 0.78 0.65 1.74 1.22 0.93 0.66
(ms) (with brake)
Brake holding torque
0.3 1.3 1.3 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 8.0 8.0
[Nt-m (min)]
Brake power consumption
o
7.2 6.5 6.5 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 18.5 18.5
(at 20 C) [W]

11-4 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 11 Specifications

C204 C206 C208 C209 C210

Model: ECMA Series
01 02 04 04 07 07 10 10 20
Brake release time
5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
[ms (Max)]
Brake pull-in time
25 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
[ms (Max)]
Vibration grade (um) 15

Operating temperature 0 ~ 40 oC

Storage temperature -10 ~ 80 oC

Operating humidity 20% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

Storage humidity 20% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

Vibration capacity 2.5G

IP65 (when waterproof connectors are used, or when an oil seal is used to
IP rating
be fitted to the rotating shaft (an oil seal model is used))

Approvals

Footnote:
*1 Rate torque values are continuous permissible values at 0~40oC ambient temperature when
attaching with the sizes of heatsinks listed below:
ECMA-__04 / 06 / 08 : 250mm x 250mm x 6mm
ECMA-__10 : 300mm x 300mm x 12mm
ECMA-__13 : 400mm x 400mm x 20mm
ECMA-__18 : 550mm x 550mm x 30mm
Material type : Aluminum – F40, F60, F80, F100, F130, F180
*2 For the specifications of the motors with rotary magnetic encoders, please refer to the
specifications of the corresponding standard models.

NOTE

1) Please refer to Section 1.2 for details about the model explanation.

Revision June 2010 11-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 11 Specifications

Medium / High Inertia Servo Motor

E213 E218 F218 G213

Model: ECMA Series
05 10 15 20 20 30 30 03 06 09

Rated output power (kW) 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.0 3.0 3.0 0.3 0.6 0.9

Rated torque (N-m) *1

2.39 4.77 7.16 9.55 9.55 14.32 19.10 2.86 5.73 8.59

Maximum torque (N-m) 7.16 14.32 21.48 28.65 28.65 42.97 57.29 8.59 17.19 21.48

Rated speed (r/min) 2000 1500 1000

Maximum speed (r/min) 3000 2000

Rated current (A) 2.9 5.6 8.3 11.01 11.22 16.1 19.4 2.5 4.8 7.5

Maximum current (A) 8.7 16.8 24.81 33.0 33.66 48.3 58.2 7.44 14.49 22.5

Power rating (kW/s)

7.0 27.1 45.9 62.5 26.3 37.3 66.4 10.0 39.0 66.0
(without brake)
Rotor moment of inertia
8.17 8.41 11.18 14.59 34.68 54.95 54.95 8.17 8.41 11.18
(× 10-4kg.m2)
Mechanical time constant
1.91 1.51 1.11 0.96 1.62 1.06 1.28 1.84 1.40 1.07
(ms)
Torque constant-KT
0.83 0.85 0.87 0.87 0.85 0.89 0.98 1.15 1.19 1.15
(N-m/A)
Voltage constant-KE
30.9 31.9 31.8 31.8 31.4 32.0 35.0 42.5 43.8 41.6
(mV/(r/min))
Armature resistance
0.57 0.47 0.26 0.174 0.119 0.052 0.077 1.06 0.82 0.43
(Ohm)
Armature inductance
7.39 5.99 4.01 2.76 2.84 1.38 1.27 14.29 11.12 6.97
(mH)
Electrical time constant
12.96 12.88 15.31 15.86 23.87 26.39 16.51 13.55 13.55 16.06
(ms)
Insulation class Class A (UL), Class B (CE)

Insulation resistance >100MΩ, DC 500V

Insulation strength AC 1500V，60 sec
Weight (kg) (without
6.8 7.0 7.5 7.8 13.5 18.5 18.5 6.8 7.0 7.5
brake)
Weight (kg) (with brake) 8.2 8.4 8.9 9.2 17.5 22.5 22.5 8.2 8.4 8.9

Max. radial shaft load (N) 490 490 490 490 1176 1470 1470 490 490 490

Max. thrust shaft load (N) 98 98 98 98 490 490 490 98 98 98

Power rating (kW/s)

6.4 24.9 43.1 59.7 24.1 35.9 63.9 9.2 35.9 62.1
(with brake)
Rotor moment of inertia
8.94 9.14 11.90 15.88 37.86 57.06 57.06 8.94 9.14 11.9
(× 10-4kg.m2) (with brake)
Mechanical time constant
2.07 1.64 1.19 1.05 1.77 1.10 1.33 2.0 1.51 1.13
(ms) (with brake)
Brake holding torque
10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
[Nt-m (min)]
Brake power
consumption 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 20.4 20.4 20.4 19.0 19.0 19.0
o
(at 20 C) [W]

11-6 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 11 Specifications

E213 E218 F218 G213

Model: ECMA Series
05 10 15 20 20 30 30 03 06 09
Brake release time
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
[ms (Max)]
Brake pull-in time
70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
[ms (Max)]
Vibration grade (um) 15

Operating temperature 0 ~ 40 oC

Storage temperature -10 ~ 80 oC

Operating humidity 20% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

Storage humidity 20% to 90% RH (non-condensing)

Vibration capacity 2.5G

IP65 (when waterproof connectors are used, or when an oil seal is used to
IP rating
be fitted to the rotating shaft (an oil seal model is used))

Approvals

Footnote:
*1 Rate torque values are continuous permissible values at 0~40oC ambient temperature when
attaching with the sizes of heatsinks listed below:
ECMA-__04 / 06 / 08 : 250mm x 250mm x 6mm
ECMA-__10 : 300mm x 300mm x 12mm
ECMA-__13 : 400mm x 400mm x 20mm
ECMA-__18 : 550mm x 550mm x 30mm
Material type : Aluminum – F40, F60, F80, F100, F130, F180
*2 For the specifications of the motors with rotary magnetic encoders, please refer to the
specifications of the corresponding standard models.

NOTE

1) Please refer to Section 1.2 for details about the model explanation.

Revision June 2010 11-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 11 Specifications

11.3 Servo Motor Speed-Torque Curves

11-8 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 11 Specifications

11.4 Overload Characteristics

„ Overload Protection Function
Overload protection is a built-in protective function to prevent a motor from overheating.

„ Occasion of Overload
1. Motor was operated for several seconds under a torque exceeding 100% torque.
2. Motor had driven high inertia machine and had accelerated and decelerated at high
frequency.
3. Motor UVW cable or encoder cable was not connected correctly.
4. Servo gain was not set properly and caused motor hunting.
5. Motor holding brake was not released.

„ Chart of load and operating time

Low Inertia Series (ECMA C2 Series)

Revision June 2010 11-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 11 Specifications

Medium and Medium-High Inertia Series (ECMA E2, F2 Series)

High Inertia Series (ECMA G2/GM Series)

11-10 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 11 Specifications

11.5 Dimensions of Servo Drive

Order P/N: ASD-B2-0121;ASD-B2-0221;ASD-B2-0421（100W ~ 400W）

WEIGHT

1.07 (2.36)

NOTE

1) Dimensions are in millimeters (inches).

2) Weights are in kilograms (kg) and (pounds (lbs)).

3) In this manual, actual measured values are in metric units. Dimensions in (imperial units)
are for reference only. Please use metric for precise measurements.

Revision June 2010 11-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 11 Specifications

Order P/N:ASD-B2-0721（750W）

WEIGHT

1.54 (3.40)

NOTE

1) Dimensions are in millimeters (inches).

2) Weights are in kilograms (kg) and (pounds (lbs)).

3) In this manual, actual measured values are in metric units. Dimensions in (imperial units)
are for reference only. Please use metric for precise measurements.

11-12 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 11 Specifications

Order P/N: ASD-B2-1021;ASD-B2-1521（1kW ~ 1.5kW）

WEIGHT

1.72 (3.79)

NOTE

1) Dimensions are in millimeters (inches).

2) Weights are in kilograms (kg) and (pounds (lbs)).

3) In this manual, actual measured values are in metric units. Dimensions in (imperial units)
are for reference only. Please use metric for precise measurements.

Revision June 2010 11-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 11 Specifications

Order P/N: ASD-B2-2023;ASD-B2-3023（2kW ~ 3kW）

WEIGHT

2.67 (5.88)

NOTE

1) Dimensions are in millimeters (inches).

2) Weights are in kilograms (kg) and (pounds (lbs)).

3) In this manual, actual measured values are in metric units. Dimensions in (imperial units)
are for reference only. Please use metric for precise measurements.

11-14 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 11 Specifications

11.6 Dimensions of Servo Motor

Motor Frame Size: 86mm and below Models

Model C20401□S C20602□S C20604□S C20804□S C20807□S C20907□S C20910□S

LC 40 60 60 80 80 86 86
LZ 4.5 5.5 5.5 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6
LA 46 70 70 90 90 100 100
S 8( +−00.009) 14( +−00.011) 14( +−00.011) 14( +−00.011) 19( +−00.013) 16( +−00.011) 16( +−00.011)
LB 30( +−00.021) 50( +−00.025) 50( +−00.025) 70( +−00.030 ) 70( +−00.030 ) 80( +−00.030 ) 80( +−00.030 )
LL (without
100.6 105.5 130.7 112.3 138.3 130.2 153.2
brake)
LL (with brake) 136.6 141.6 166.8 152.8 178 161.3 184.3
LS (without oil
20 27 27 27 32 30 30
seal)
LS (with oil seal) 20 24 24 24.5 29.5 30 30
LR 25 30 30 30 35 35 35
LE 2.5 3 3 3 3 3 3
LG 5 7.5 7.5 8 8 8 8
LW 16 20 20 20 25 20 20
RH 6.2 11 11 11 15.5 13 13
WK 3 5 5 5 6 5 5
W 3 5 5 5 6 5 5
T 3 5 5 5 6 5 5
M3 M4 M4 M4 M6 M5 M5
TP
Depth 8 Depth 15 Depth 15 Depth 15 Depth 20 Depth 15 Depth 15

NOTE

1) Dimensions are in millimeters.

2) Dimensions and weights of the servo motor may be revised without prior notice.
3) The boxes (…) in the model names are for optional configurations. (Please refer to section 1.2
for model explanation.)
4) Except ECMA-CM0604PS LL: 116.2mm, for the specifications of the motors with rotary
magnetic encoders, please refer to the specifications of the corresponding standard models.

Revision June 2010 11-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 11 Specifications

Motor Frame Size: 100mm ~ 130mm Models

Model G21303□S E21305□S G21306□S G21309□S C21010□S

LC 130 130 130 130 100
LZ 9 9 9 9 9
LA 145 145 145 145 115
S 22( +−00.013) 22( +−00.013) 22( +−00.013) 22( +−00.013) 22( +−00.013)
LB 110( +−00.035) 110( +−00.035) 110( +−00.035) 110( +−00.035) 95( +−00.035)
LL (without brake) 147.5 147.5 147.5 163.5 153.3
LL (with brake) 183.5 183.5 183.5 198 192.5
LS 47 47 47 47 37
LR 55 55 55 55 45
LE 6 6 6 6 5
LG 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 12
LW 36 36 36 36 32
RH 18 18 18 18 18
WK 8 8 8 8 8
W 8 8 8 8 8
T 7 7 7 7 7
M6 M6 M6 M6 M6
TP
Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20

NOTE

1) Dimensions are in millimeters.

2) Dimensions and weights of the servo motor may be revised without prior notice.
3) The boxes (…) in the model names are for optional configurations. (Please refer to section 1.2
for model explanation.)
4) For the specifications of the motors with rotary magnetic encoders, please refer to the
specifications of the corresponding standard models.

11-16 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 11 Specifications

Motor Frame Size: 100mm ~ 130mm Models

Model E21310□S E21315□S C21020□S E21320□S

LC 130 130 100 130
LZ 9 9 9 9
LA 145 145 115 145
S 22( +−00.013) 22( +−00.013) 22( +−00.013) 22( +−00.013)
LB 110( +−00.035) 110( +−00.035) 95( +−00.035) 110( +−00.035)
LL (without brake) 147.5 167.5 199 187.5
LL (with brake) 183.5 202 226 216
LS 47 47 37 47
LR 55 55 45 55
LE 6 6 5 6
LG 11.5 11.5 12 11.5
LW 36 36 32 36
RH 18 18 18 18
WK 8 8 8 8
W 8 8 8 8
T 7 7 7 7
M6 M6 M6 M6
TP
Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20

NOTE

1) Dimensions are in millimeters.

2) Dimensions and weights of the servo motor may be revised without prior notice.
3) The boxes (…) in the model names are for optional configurations. (Please refer to section 1.2
for model explanation.)

Revision June 2010 11-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Chapter 11 Specifications

Motor Frame Size: 180mm Models

Model E21820□S E21830□S F21830□S

LC 180 180 180
LZ 13.5 13.5 13.5
LA 200 200 200
S 35( +−00.016) 35( +−00.016) 35( +−00.016)
LB 114.3( +−00.035) 114.3( +−00.035) 114.3( +−00.035)
LL (without brake) 169 202.1 202.1
LL (with brake) 203.1 235.3 235.3
LS 73 73 73
LR 79 79 79
LE 4 4 4
LG 20 20 20
LW 63 63 63
RH 30 30 30
WK 10 10 10
W 10 10 10
T 8 8 8
M12 M12 M12
TP
Depth 25 Depth 25 Depth 25

NOTE

1) Dimensions are in millimeters.

2) Dimensions and weights of the servo motor may be revised without prior notice.
3) The boxes (…) in the model names are for optional configurations. (Please refer to section 1.2
for model explanation.)

11-18 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Appendix A Accessories

„ Power Connectors

Delta Part Number: ASDBCAPW0000

Title Part No. Manufacturer

Housing C4201H00-2*2PA JOWLE
Terminal C4201TOP-2 JOWLE

Delta Part Number:ASDBCAPW0100

Title Part No. Manufacturer

Housing C4201H00-2*3PA JOWLE
Terminal C4201TOP-2 JOWLE

Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW1000

Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW2000

Revision June 2010 A-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Appendix A Accessories

„ Power Cables

Delta Part Number: ASDBCAPW0203／0205

Title Part No. Manufacturer

Housing C4201H00-2*2PA JOWLE
Terminal C4201TOP-2 JOWLE

L
Title Part No.
mm inch
1 ASDBCAPW0203 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
2 ASDBCAPW0205 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2

Delta Part Number: ASDBCAPW0303／0305

Title Part No. Manufacturer

Housing C4201H00-2*3PA JOWLE
Terminal C4201TOP-2 JOWLE

L
Title Part No.
mm inch
1 ASDBCAPW0303 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
2 ASDBCAPW0305 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2

A-2 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Appendix A Accessories

„ Power Cables, cont.

Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW1203／1205

L
Title Part No. Straight
mm inch
1 ASD-CAPW1203 3106A-20-18S 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
2 ASD-CAPW1205 3106A-20-18S 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2

Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW1303／1305

L
Title Part No. Straight
mm inch
1 ASD-CAPW1303 3106A-20-18S 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
2 ASD-CAPW1305 3106A-20-18S 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2

Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW2203／2205

L
Title Part No. Straight
mm inch
1 ASD-CAPW2203 3106A-24-11S 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
2 ASD-CAPW2205 3106A-24-11S 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2

Revision June 2010 A-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Appendix A Accessories

Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW2303／2305

L
Title Part No. Straight
mm inch
1 ASD-CAPW2303 3106A-24-11S 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
2 ASD-CAPW2305 3106A-24-11S 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2

„ Encoder Connectors

Delta Part Number: ASDBCAEN0000

Title Part No. Manufacturer

Housing AMP (1-172161-9) AMP
Terminal AMP (170359-3) AMP
CLAMP DELTA (34703237XX) DELTA

Delta Part Number: ASDBCAEN1000

A-4 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Appendix A Accessories

„ Encoder Cables

Delta Part Number: ASDBCAEN0003／0005

Title Part No. Manufacturer

Housing AMP (1-172161-9) AMP
Terminal AMP (170359-3) AMP
CLAMP DELTA (34703237XX) DELTA

L
Title Part No.
mm inch
1 ASDBCAEN0003 3000 ± 50 118 ±2
2 ASDBCAEN0005 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2

Delta Part Number: ASDBCAEN1003／1005

L
Title Part No. Straight
mm inch
1 ASDBCAEN1003 3106A-20-29S 3000 ± 50 118 ± 2
2 ASDBCAEN1005 3106A-20-29S 5000 ± 50 197 ± 2

Revision June 2010 A-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Appendix A Accessories

„ I/O Signal Connector (CN1)

Delta Part Number: ASDBCNDS0044

„ Communication Cable between Drive and Computer (for PC)

Delta Part Number: ASD-CARS0003

L
Title Part No.
mm inch
1 ASD-CARS0003 3000 ± 100 118 ±4

„ Servo Drive, Servo Motor and Accessories Combinations

100W Servo Drive and 100W Low Inertia Servo Motor

Servo Drive ASD-B2-0121-B
Low inertia
ECMA-C20401□S
Servo Motor
Without Brake With Brake
3M 5M 3M 5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
Cable - -
ASDBCAPW0203 ASDBCAPW0205
Encoder Cable Encoder Cable
- -
ASDBCAEN0003 ASDBCAEN0005
Power Connector ASDBCAPW0000
Connector
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN0000

A-6 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Appendix A Accessories

200W Servo Drive and 200W Low Inertia Servo Motor

Servo Drive ASD-B2-0221-B
Low inertia
ECMA-C20602□S
Servo Motor
Without Brake With Brake
3M 5M 3M 5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
Cable
ASDBCAPW0203 ASDBCAPW0205 ASDBCAPW0303 ASDBCAPW0305
Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN0003 ASDBCAEN0005 ASDBCAEN0003 ASDBCAEN0005
Power Connector ASDBCAPW0000 Power Connector ASDBCAPW0100
Connector
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN0000

400W Servo Drive and 400W Low Inertia Servo Motor

Servo Drive ASD-B2-0421-B
ECMA-C20604□S
Low inertia
ECMA-CM0604PS
Servo Motor
ECMA-C20804□7
Without Brake With Brake
3M 5M 3M 5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
Cable
ASDBCAPW0203 ASDBCAPW0205 ASDBCAPW0303 ASDBCAPW0305
Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN0003 ASDBCAEN0005 ASDBCAEN0003 ASDBCAEN0005
Power Connector ASDBCAPW0000 Power Connector ASDBCAPW0100
Connector
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN0000

400W Servo Drive and 500W Medium Inertia Servo Motor

Medium inertia
ECMA-E21305□S
Servo Motor
Without Brake Without Brake
3M 5M 3M 5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
Cable
ASD-CAPW1203 ASD-CAPW1205 ASD-CAPW1303 ASD-CAPW1305
Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN1003 ASDBCAEN1005 ASDBCAEN1003 ASDBCAEN1005
Power Connector ASD-CAPW1000
Connector
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN1000

Revision June 2010 A-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Appendix A Accessories

400W Servo Drive and 300W High Inertia Servo Motor

Servo Drive ASD-B2-0421-B
High inertia
ECMA-G21303□S
Servo Motor
Without Brake With Brake
3M 5M 3M 5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
Cable
ASD-CAPW1203 ASD-CAPW1205 ASD-CAPW1303 ASD-CAPW1305
Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN1003 ASDBCAEN1005 ASDBCAEN1003 ASDBCAEN1005
Power Connector ASD-CAPW1000
Connector
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN1000

750W Servo Drive and 750W Low Inertia Servo Motor

Servo Drive ASD-B2-0721-B
Low inertia ECMA-C20807□S
Servo Motor ECMA-C20907□S
Without Brake With Brake
3M 5M 3M 5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
Cable
ASDBCAPW0203 ASDBCAPW0205 ASDBCAPW0303 ASDBCAPW0305
Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN0003 ASDBCAEN0005 ASDBCAEN0003 ASDBCAEN0005
Power Connector ASDBCAPW0000 Power Connector ASDBCAPW0100
Connector
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN0000

750W Servo Drive and 600W High Inertia Servo Motor

Servo Drive ASD-B2-0721-B
High inertia ECMA-G21306□S
Servo Motor ECMA-GM1306PS
Without Brake With Brake
3M 5M 3M 5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
Cable
ASD-CAPW1203 ASD-CAPW1205 ASD-CAPW1303 ASD-CAPW1305
Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN1003 ASDBCAEN1005 ASDBCAEN1003 ASDBCAEN1005
Power Connector ASD-CAPW1000
Connector
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN1000

A-8 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Appendix A Accessories

1kW Servo Drive and 1kW Low Inertia Servo Motor

Servo Drive ASD-B2-1021-B
Low inertia ECMA-C21010□S
Servo Motor ECMA-C20910□S
Without Brake With Brake
3M 5M 3M 5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
Cable
ASD-CAPW1203 ASD-CAPW1205 ASD-CAPW1303 ASD-CAPW1305
Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN1003 ASDBCAEN1005 ASDBCAEN1003 ASDBCAEN1005
Power Connector ASDBCAPW1000
Connector
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN1000

1kW Servo Drive and 1kW Medium Inertia Servo Motor

Servo Drive ASD-B2-1021-B
Medium inertia
ECMA-E21310□S
Servo Motor
Without Brake With Brake
3M 5M 3M 5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
Cable
ASD-CAPW1203 ASD-CAPW1205 ASD-CAPW1303 ASD-CAPW1305
Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN1003 ASDBCAEN1005 ASDBCAEN1003 ASDBCAEN1005
Power Connector ASD-CAPW1000
Connector
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN1000

1kW Servo Drive and 900W High Inertia Servo Motor

Servo Drive ASD-B2-1021-B
High inertia ECMA-G21309□S
Servo Motor ECMA-GM1309PS
Without Brake With Brake
3M 5M 3M 5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
Cable
ASD-CAPW1203 ASD-CAPW1205 ASD-CAPW1303 ASD-CAPW1305
Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN1003 ASDBCAEN1005 ASDBCAEN1003 ASDBCAEN1005
Power Connector ASD-CAPW1000
Connector
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN1000

Revision June 2010 A-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Appendix A Accessories

1.5kW Servo Drive and 1.5kW Medium Inertia Servo Motor

Servo Drive ASD-B2-1521-B
Medium inertia
ECMA-E21315□S
Servo Motor
Without Brake With Brake
3M 5M 3M 5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
Cable
ASD-CAPW1203 ASD-CAPW1205 ASD-CAPW1303 ASD-CAPW1305
Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN1003 ASDBCAEN1005 ASDBCAEN1003 ASDBCAEN1005
Power Connector ASD-CAPW1000
Connector
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN1000

2kW Servo Drive and 2kW Low Inertia Servo Motor

Servo Drive ASD-B2-2023-B
Low inertia
ECMA-C21020□S
Servo Motor
Without Brake With Brake
3M 5M 3M 5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
Cable
ASD-CAPW1203 ASD-CAPW1205 ASD-CAPW1303 ASD-CAPW1305
Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN1003 ASDBCAEN1005 ASDBCAEN1003 ASDBCAEN1005
Power Connector ASD-CAPW1000
Connector
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN1000

2kW Servo Drive and 2kW Medium Inertia Servo Motor

Servo Drive ASD-B2-2023-B
Medium inertia
ECMA-E21320□S
Servo Motor
Without Brake With Brake
3M 5M 3M 5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
Cable
ASD-CAPW1203 ASD-CAPW1205 ASD-CAPW1303 ASD-CAPW1305
Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN1003 ASDBCAEN1005 ASDBCAEN1003 ASDBCAEN1005
Power Connector ASD-CAPW1000
Connector
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN1000

A-10 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Appendix A Accessories

2kW Servo Drive and 2kW Medium Inertia Servo Motor

Servo Drive ASD-B2-2023-B
Medium inertia
ECMA-E21820□S
Servo Motor
Without Brake With Brake
3M 5M 3M 5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
Cable
ASD-CAPW2203 ASD-CAPW2205 ASD-CAPW2303 ASD-CAPW2305
Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN1003 ASDBCAEN1005 ASDBCAEN1003 ASDBCAEN1005
Power Connector ASD-CAPW2000
Connector
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN1000

3kW Servo Drive and 3kW Medium Inertia Servo Motor

Servo Drive ASD-B2-3023-B
Medium inertia
ECMA-E21830□S
Servo Motor
Without Brake With Brake
3M 5M 3M 5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
Cable
ASD-CAPW2203 ASD-CAPW2205 ASD-CAPW2303 ASD-CAPW2305
Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN1003 ASDBCAEN1005 ASDBCAEN1003 ASDBCAEN1005
Power Connector ASD-CAPW2000
Connector
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN1000

3kW Servo Drive and 3kW Medium Inertia Servo Motor

Servo Drive ASD-B2-3023-B
Medium inertia
ECMA-F21830□S
Servo Motor
Without Brake With Brake
3M 5M 3M 5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
Cable
ASD-CAPW2203 ASD-CAPW2205 ASD-CAPW2303 ASD-CAPW2305
Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN1003 ASDBCAEN1005 ASDBCAEN1003 ASDBCAEN1005
Power Connector ASD-CAPW2000
Connector
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN1000

Revision June 2010 A-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Appendix A Accessories

Other Accessories (for ASDA-B2 series all models)

Description Delta Part Number
Communication Cable between Drive and ASD-CARS0003
Computer (for PC)
　Regenerative Resistor 400W 100Ω BR400W040
Regenerative Resistor 3kW 10Ω BR1K0W020

NOTE

1) The boxes (…) at the ends of the servo drive model names are for optional configurations (Full
closed-loop, CANopen and extension DI port). For the actual model name, please refer to the
ordering information of the actual purchased product.
2) The boxes (…) in the servo motor model names are for optional configurations (keyway, brake
and oil seal).

A-12 Revision June 2010

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine